高一英语Unit12教案(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

时间：2022-12-10 05:29:35 作者：qaz0457 教案收藏本文下载本文

“qaz0457”通过精心收集，向本站投稿了17篇高一英语Unit12教案(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)，以下是小编为大家整理后的高一英语Unit12教案(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)，希望对您有所帮助。

目录
第1篇：高一英语Unit12教案(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第2篇：高一英语Unit8教案(新课标版高一英语教案教学设计)第3篇：高一第六单元全单元 (新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第4篇：高一英语Unit7 Reading教案(新课标版高一英语教案教学设计)第5篇：Unit 5 Modern hero(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第6篇：unit 8 Reading sports(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第7篇：Unit 6 good manners5(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第8篇：Unit 6 good manners2(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第9篇：高一上期末词组复习(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第10篇：学习手册Unit12 Art and literature(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第11篇：高一新课标第三模块人教版教案(新课标版高一英语必修三教案教学设计)第12篇：模块一第一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)第13篇：Module 6 cultural corner 教案教学设计(新课标版英语高一)第14篇：高一下英语词汇复习(新课标版高一英语下册教案教学设计)第15篇：高一必修4Unit1教案包(新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)第16篇：unit 17 Famous women peiod2(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)第17篇：unit 17 Famous women peiod1(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

篇1：高一英语Unit12教案(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Teaching aims and demands:

a. Achieve language skills and related knowledge about art and literature;

b. Learn to make decisions and give opinions

c. Vocabulary in this unit:

the words and expressions listed on the teacher’s book

d. Grammar:

the Restrictive and Non-Restrictive Attributive Clause

Lesson 1

Main points

1.Words

exhibition; give opinions; show; local

2.Functional items

Making decisions and give opinions

Diffcult points

give opinions

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Lead-in

T: Do you like painting? Do you know anything about painting?

Ss talk about painting.

Step 2 Warming up

1.Look at the following paintings and match them with the correct painters.

2.Check answers and talk about the pictures and painters.

3.Ask students to discuss the first two questions in pairs.

4.Several pairs report answers.

Step 3 Listening

1.Make sure the students know what to do.

2.Play the tape two or three times as necessary. Pause at important points and give the students help.

3.Check the answers.

Step 4 Speaking

1.Choose one situation and read the instructions.

2.Read the useful expressions for making decisions &giving opinions.

3.Ss work in pairs to make a dialogue.

4.Several pairs act out.

Step 5 Language points

1. opinion n.

in one's opinion

Ep: In my opinion, he has done a very good job.

give/express one's opinion on/upon

Ep: He has given his opinion on this problem.

2. local adj.

the local doctor

locl customs

locl government

Homework

Practise giving opinions and making decisions.

Lesson 2

Main points

1.Words

magic; power; wonder; a series of; treat; in trouble; come across; believe in; habit; welcome; enough; be afraid of; tell &say

2.Sentence patterns

as...as...

Difficult points

be afraid of doing &be afraid to do

speak, tell &say

Teaching procedures

Step 1. Revision

Check the homework.

Step 2. Pre-reading

1.Q: Have you read any of the Harry Potter books or watched the films?

A: Any possible answers.

2.Harry Potter has magical powers .Do you know any other heroes who have strange powers?

A: Any possible answers.

Step 3. Reading

T: I think you are all interested in stories about magic. Then we'll read a passage about a boy with magic--Harry Potter. Read the text and find answers to the questions.

1.Q:What's Harry's life like before he goes to Hogwarts?

A:Unhappy.They treated him badly.

2.Q:What is taught in Hogwarts?

A:Witchcraft and wizardy.

Step 4 Post-reading

Ask students to read the text again and answers the following questions.

1.Q:Why is Harry's life miserable before he goes to Hogwarts?

A:His parents are dead and the family he is living with treats him badly.

2.Q:What does Harry learn about himself at Hogwarts?

A:Harry learns that he needs to be strong/he needs friends/it is difficult to do the right thing/life is more complicated than he thought/...

Then finish Ex 2 on P81 and check answers.

Step 5 Language points

1.magic

adj.

The music is really magic.

Some people still believe in magic.

the magic of great poetry

2.be afraid to do/be afraid of doing

I'm afraid to tell her.

He was afraid of falling into the river.

3.as...as...

It's as cold as ice.

He drove as fast as he could.

Step 6 Listening to the tape

Homework

Recite the text and language points.

Lesson 3

Main points

Words

one after another; go hiking

Difficult points

go+v.-ing

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Revision

1.Check the homework.

2.Ask several students to say something. about music.

Step 2 Grammar

The Non-Restrictive Attibutive Clause

1.Revise the rules.

2.Give the Ss several minutes to do the exercises in pairs orally.

3.Check the answers.

Step 3 Do Ex on P153

Homework

Review the grammar.

Lesson 4

Main points

1.Words

shoulder; whisper; turn around; stupid; compare; announcement; noise,sound&voice; work; open up; each other

2.Sentence patterns

It sounds like...

such...that...

It looked as if...

...not all of them are safe

If only they could find a way to...

He was just about to say something when...

She didn't have time to finish before the wall...

Difficult points

If only...

Teaching procedures

Step 1 Revision

1.Review the grammar.

2.Make sentence with the following words and expressions:

exhibition; wonder; a series of

Step 2 Presentation

In this period we'll read a passage about Harry Porter again.

1.T helps the Ss understand the passage and what to do.

2.Ss write the ending.

3.Several students read their endings and let the Ss choose which is the best.

Step 3 Language points

1.noise, voice &sound

noise: loud and unpleasant sound

Another kind of pollution is noise.

voice: the sound made through the mouth, esp. of human beings ,in speaking or singing.

He shouted at the top of his voice.

sound: the sound of music

2. if only...

If only I had more money, I could buy some new clothes.

If only she would listen to me!

3. turn around=turn round

He turned around to find a policeman following him.

Step 4 Listening

Homework

Revise all the words and expressions in this unit.

篇2：高一英语Unit8教案(新课标版高一英语教案教学设计)

Teaching aims and demands

类别课程标准要求掌握的项目

话题 1． Talk about sports

2． Talk about interests and hobbies

3． Talk about the Olympics

4． Write a sports star’s profile

功能 Interests and hobbies

Which do you like…or …?

What’s your favorite sport?

Which sport do you like best?

Which do you prefer…or…?

What about…?

Are you interested in…?

词汇 continent well-known athlete gold medal torch badminton tie final dive shooting

Greece competitor motto further rank gymnastics prepare preparation effect flame

compete flag weight position superstar point skill weigh title gesture facial

stand for because of speed skating track and field take part

in preparation for

语法 Future Passive Voice

The people of Beijing will plant more trees and build new roads.(陈述句)

More trees will be planted and new roads will be built by the people of Beijing.

Beijing will hold the 29th Olympic Games in the year 2008.（疑问句）

When will the 29th Olympic Games be held in Beijing.

Period Arrangements:

warming up reading materials

Period 1 listening Period 2,3

speaking language focus

listening (WB) complementary listening material

speaking

Period 4 speaking Period 5 complementary reading material

writing(WB)

integrating skill(writing) assessment

Teaching Procedures of Period 1:

Step1.Warming up (15 mins)

Ss know a lot about sports from everyday life and media, so I arrange such a task -discussion(group of 4):

Q: What do you know about sports?

During this process, if Ss can’t express themselves in English, Chinese is also all right. Besides, it is a

good chance to present new words. If necessary, I will make some complements. At the same time, I will present them as many pictures about sports as possible.

Possible response:

school sports meet

Sports meet the National Games

the Asian Games

the Olympic Games

the World Cup

etc

ball games: volleyball, basket ball, football, table tennis, tennis, ,golf

badminton, bowling, baseball, American football, ice hockey etc

Events of sports track and field: relay race, long jump, high jump, pole jump, discus, shot, javelin etc

gymnastic: rings, double bars, high and low bars, horse , free exercise

swimming/shooting/skiing/ ice sports/diving/aquatic sports etc

Sport stars : Beckham, Mike Owen, Michael Jordan etc

Purpose: This activity is designed to encourage students to think about sports and activate

relevant vocabulary.

Step 2. Speaking(15 mins)

Task1(pair work): Talk about their favourite sports, favourite sports stars, and the reason why they like them, with the following expressions as a guide.(See SB p52)

Task2(pair work): A survey about physical fitness (See postscript 1)

Task3(group work): Add up their total scores and divide by the number of people. Then get their group’s average scores. Discuss their survey answers.

1). Do you think your group is doing well or not? Why ?

2). How can you become fitter?

Purpose: The students will use the information from the above step to talk about their interests and hobbies and to practise giving reasons for their opinions.

Step 3. Listening (15 mins)

Task 1: Brainstorming(encourage Ss to tell me as many words about that as possible)

Purpose: to work as a guide of listening part.

Task 2: Listen to three sports reports and fill in the missing information

Purpose: In this activity, the students will hear three sports reports about basketball, football table tennis. It is what they are interested in and to learn to understand sports news report.

Step 4. Homework Assignment

Task: Find out some background information about the Olympics. T will offer them some websites as well:

www.olympic.org www.specialolympics.org/

www.athens.olympics.org/ www.beijing-2008.org

Purpose: This activity is related to the reading material of next period. To encourage Ss to find out the information by themselves.

Teaching procedures of period 2

Step1. Lead-in(10 mins)

Task 1. Collect the information Ss have found, and this is a good chance to present new words. If necessary, warming up Ex can work as a guide. At the same time T will display some relevant pictures.

Five rings Aisa Europe Africa America Oceania

IOC International Olympic committee

Headquater Lausanne Switzerland

Motto swifter higher stronger

Present President Jac ques Rogge

Official language English French Spanish Russian German

Host city of 2000 Olympics Sydney Australia

Host city of 2004 Olympics Athens Greece

Host city of 2008 Olympics Beijing China

Host city of the first Olympics Athens Greece

Sort Winter Olympics Summer Olympics

Purpose: to help Ss get as much background knowledge about the Olympics as possible

Task 2.Group work to discuss any of following questions:

1).Why do so many athletes want to take part in the Olympic Games?

2).Are the Olympic Games important to our society? Why or why not?

Purpose: the activity is designed to get Ss to think about the Olympics as a preliminary activity related to the reading material.

Step2. Reading(10 mins)

Task1.Skimming to find out what is the reading material going to talk about.

Possible answer: the Olympics

Task2. Scanning to find the topic words

Possible answer: the Winter Olympics , the Summer Olympics, the ancient Olympics,

the modern Olympics, the Olympic motto, the 2008 Olympics

Purpose: to train Ss to glance through the passage quickly to get a general idea.

Task3. Careful reading to find out the main idea of each paragraph.

Purpose: to train Ss how to find out the main idea of a paragraph.

Step3.Consolidation(10 mins)

Task1. Play the passage through once and ask Ss to underline some words and phrases they think useful.

Task2.Match the new words and their meanings(See WB Ex)

Task3.Fill in a form about the passage

Olympics Year Location China’s gold medals competitors

old Greece

no female competitors

1st in modern times

23rd

2000

2008 ? ?

Purpose: to have a better understanding of the passage and note some useful words and phrases.

Step4.Discussion(15 mins)

Task1: Group work (group of 4) to discuss the following topics and they can choose whichever they are interested in talking about.

Topic1. What is the spirit of the Olympic Games? What can you learn from it?

Topic2. Do you agree that” faster, higher, stronger” is a good motto not only for sports but also for life in general? Why?

Topic3.Is it important to win in a sports match? Why or why not?

Topic4.Discuss the causes and effects of some serious problems of the Olympics and think of the possible solutions.

Task2: Debate

Hosting the Olympic games is a great honour and a great responsibility. Since china has won the bidding

of hosting the 2008 Olympics, what will the Olympics bring to China, good effects or bad effects.

good effects bad effects

promote the economy costing a large amount of money

make china better known to the world cause disorder to our society

… …

Purpose: to have a further understanding about the Olympics.

Step5.Homework assignment

Write a report based on the debate carried out in class about the good effects and bad effects of the Olympics. And encourage Ss to express their own idea in the report.

Purpose: to cultivate them how to write discussed topics

Teaching procedures of period 3

Step1. Extensive reading (WB) (15 mins)

Task 1. Read the passage and have a discussion about some related questions.

1).What are some problems that unknown athletes have to deal with?

2).Why are the Olympic Games so important to many athletes?

3).Why do stars like Michael Jordan make more money than other athletes?

Task 2.Pair work Compare the sports listed. Are they popular in china? Why or why not?

Sports Popular /not very popular Reasons

Tennis

Soccer

Table tennis

Badminton

Purpose: to know more about sports and the Olympics.

Step2.Speaking(5 mins)

Task 1. China is going to host the 2008 Olympic Games. To make it the most wonderful and successful one, what will be done ? If necessary, T can display two pictures for contrast.

Task 2. As for Ss, Chinese, what will they do for the 2008 Olympics?

Purpose: to make Ss note the use of Future Passive Voice and Future Active Voice.

Step3. Language focus (25 mins)

Task1. Group work to get a conclusion of the Future Passive Voice and give T more examples.

Structure: Subject+ will be done

Task2. Show Ss a passage about the Olympics, and ask them to change it into passive voice.(See postscript 2)

Task3. Pair work to ask questions about the passage with what , when, where, how etc.

Task4. T has left a note to you ,asking you to write a notice for the students in Future Passive Voice. Work with their partners and write down the notice. Then report it to class orally.

Next week we are going to clear the school as follows:

Monday--- Classroom Building No.1

Tuesday--- Classroom Building No.2

Wednesday--- the computer center and language lab

Thursday--- the science labs

Friday--- the library

Purpose: to consolidate their understanding about the Future Passive Voice.

Step4.Homework assignment

Task1. Finish some consolidation Ex of the Future Passive Voice

Task2. Find out as much information as possible about their favourite sports stars

Purpose: to encourage Ss to do what they are interested in

Teaching procedures of period 4

Step1.Listening(5 mins)

Ss will hear something about some sports stars and make their own decision according to what they have heard.

Step2.Speaking (10 mins)

Guessing Game. Check what Ss have got about their favourite sports star.. Ask some Ss to come up to the front to tell what they have found while others guess the names of the sports stars.

Purpose: to work as a preliminary step of writing.

Step3.Writing (30 mins)

Task 1.Brainstorming. Ask Ss to think out information about Yao ming as much as possible.

Task 2. Read the profile about Yao ming and find out what are the useful information for writing a profile.

Purpose: This activity is to let Ss find out how to write a profile by themselves.

Task 3. Write similar profiles about their favourite sports stars and check some typical ones in class.

Step4.Homework assigment

Suppose the Chinese Olympic Committee is inviting applications for volunteer jobs for the 2008 Olympic Games and Ss want to apply for the job.Try to write a profile to introduce themselves.

Teaching procedures of period 5

Step1.Listening(10 mins)

Complementary listening material: It is important to be able to recognize and understand numbers quickly when listening to spoken English.Many sports listening tasks involve numbers.Listen to the speakers and extract the numbers which are needed to complete these tables.(See postscript 3)

Purpose: to make Ss get used to listening to English sports news in daily life.

Step2.Speaking(10 mins)

Imagine the world in the year 5,000. What will our life be like then? Make a list of the things that you think will be done differently. Try to use the Passive Voice as much as possible.

Example sentences:

Eating food I think all food will be turned into juice and chopsticks won’t be used.

Drinking water

Wearing clothes

Building houses

Driving cars

Reading books

Purpose: to revise the language focus in this unit.

Step3.Reading(10 mins)

Read a complementary reading material about sports and finish the relevant Ex.(See postscript 4)

Purpose: to offer Ss further information about sports so that they will have better understanding.

Step4.Writing(15 mins)

Task 1: Group work to talk about the sports as the sample. One member of the group write down what they have got during their discussion and another report what they have written down.

Sport: Soccer

Objective:

Shoot the ball into the other

Team’s goal

Number of players:

Two teams of eleven players:ten outfielders and a goalkeepers

Sports field:

Grass playing field

Equipment:

Football,two goals

Basic rules:

1. Players are not allowed to use their hands.

2. … Sport: Table tennis

Objective:

Number of players:

Sports field:

Equipment:

Basic rules: Sport:

Objective:

Number of players:

Sports field:

Equipment:

Basic rules:

Sport:

Objective:

Number of players:

Sports field:

Equipment:

Basic rules:

Task 2: Write a short essay in which you compare two sports

Step5.Homework Assignment

Task1: Since Ss have learned the whole unit, they must know more about sports. After class, ask Ss to find some scenes which have make them moved and tell us the reasons.

Purpose: This activity is designed to check what Ss have learned from this unit.

Task2: Assessment

Purpose: to help Ss to reflect on how and what they have learned from this unit.

Through the whole unit a good many different kinds of assessment have been presented in the form of listening,speaking,reading and writing.But as a whole unit, I design such two forms to let Ss clearly know their own performances.

Form 1: (total score 5)

listening speaking reading writing

Self assessment

Peer assessment

Teacher assessment

Form 2: set improvement goal

Your name Date

a. What were your goals for this unit?

b. Did you reach your goal?

c. What different ways of learning did you use?

d. Which did you like best?

e. What your goals for the next unit?

f. How do you plan to reach them?

g. Will you ask some of your classmates for ideas and try new ways of learning?

The Olympic Games

Our country will

篇3：高一第六单元全单元 (新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

教学目标

1．知识目标

1)重要词汇：

interrupt apologize introduce culture manner manners impression behave cloth custom course raise advice drink to start with leave our stare at make jokes about sb

2)句型：

1. He apologizes for losing it by saying …

2. Having good table manners means knowing, for example, how to use…

3. When drinking to someone’s health, you raise your glasses, but…

4. They make me think of the happy days we spent together.

3)语法

定语从句( the Attributive Clause )

1. 能够用英语描述人物、事件、时间、地点、原因等-- 使用限制性定语从句：

I spent the whole afternoon with the teacher who was very helpful.

2. 能够用英语对特定的人物、事件、时间、地点、原因等作补充说明--使用非限制性定语从句：

I spent the whole afternoon with the teacher, who was helpful.

道歉与致谢( Apologizing & Expressing thanks)

Excuse me. Forgive me.

I’m (very/so/terribly) sorry.

That’s all right. /That’s OK. /No problem.

I apologize for …Oh, well, that’s life.

I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to …

Oops. Sorry about that.

Thank you. It’s beautiful.

能力目标

1. To teach the students how to behave well and write thank-you letter correctly.

2. To develop the students’ ability of expressing themselves and thinking in English.

情感目标

1. To get the students to understand the differences between Chinese and western table manners and learn how to self-discipline in social activities.

2. To make the students know the importance of being polite and how to make themselves behave properly in communication with others.

Period 1 Listening

Teaching aims:

1. To improve the students’ listening ability by listening to the information on the usage of informal and formal ways of apologizing.

2. To improve the students’ listening ability by listening to the given listening passage.

Suggestions for teaching:

1. Important and difficult points:

1. Getting the most important information of the dialogue on the topic of apologizing.

2. Getting the general idea of the given listening passage.

2. Suggested teaching methods:

Activity 1 Lead-in

The topic is to talk about good manners in our daily life. The teacher may begin this activity with these words: In our daily life, it is very important to be polite in communicating with others. Whether in China or in foreign countries, we should pay attention to our manners. But what are good manners in your opinion?

Encourage the students to express themselves freely in class.

Activity 2 Free talk

Collect the students’ opinions about good manners in different situations. The teacher may design some situations previously for the students to practise what they should do or say to show their politeness. First make some pairs act our their dialogues in class and then discuss in class whether they have good manners or not.

Suggested situations:

1. How to ask the way when you come to a new place?

2. What can you say if you want to interrupt others when they are talking?

3. You want to join a party that has begun.

Activity 3 Warming up

The teacher may begin this activity with picture description. Ask the students to look at the pictures carefully and complete the dialogues given. Give the students chances to discuss and act out the dialogues in class.

Activity 4 Listening

This activity may be performed this way:

1. Play the tape for the students to listen and let the students make sure what has happened in the dialogue.

2. Play the tape once again. This time ask the students to pay attention to how Bill made apologies to Cliff and how Cliff answered.

Activity 5 Role-play

This activity is a productive one. Suppose one student is Bill and the other is Cliff. Give the students chances to express themselves in the same situation. Encourage the students to act out their dialogues in class after a few minutes’ preparation.

Activity 6 Discussion

Topic for discussion: What are good manners in this situation?

This is productive work. The students should be encouraged to express themselves freely in class. At the same time discuss what are good manners at school?

HOMEWORK:

1. 预习课文。

2. 背诵生词

3.《课课练》配套练习

教后小记

Period 2 Speaking

Teaching aims:

1. To improve the students’ speaking ability by talking about how to practise making apologies in different situations.

2. To make the students learn to express themselves correctly and freely, using the polite expressions, such as , “I’m sorry”, “Thank you”, “Excuse me, but…” and so on.

Suggestions for teaching:

1. Important and difficult points:

1. Understanding the ways of making apologies by performing speaking activities.

2. Learning to use proper expressions for making apologies freely.

2. Suggested teaching methods:

Activity 1 Discussion

Topic for discussion: What are good manners or bad manners in our daily life?

The teacher may begin this way: We often say or hear “He is a good boy because he has good manners. / She is a girl with good manners so everyone likes her.” What do you think good manners are? Please give some examples of good manners in your life.

Hints: behavior at school; greeting; talking with parents; eating at table; etc.

Activity 2 Discussion

Ask the students to practice useful expressions of making apologies.

Hints for teachers: This activity should be a free activity. The purpose is to revise what we have learned in Period 1. Encourage the students to express themselves freely in class. No given situations this time

Activity 3 Language study

It is a summary to Activity 2. Make sure the students grasp the basic usage of the following expressions.

Ways of making apologies Forgive me. I’m very sorry.

I apologize for…

I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to…

Oops. Sorry about that.

Possible answers Oh, that’s all right.

Oh, well, that’s life.

It’s OK.

No problem.

Collect other ways of making apologies and possible answers from the students.

Activity 4 Role play

This activity is a controlled one. The students are encouraged to make up their own dialogues based on the given situations. Before practicing, make sure the students are quite clear about each situation. In situation 1, three persons are required to get involved.

Activity 5 Extension

This is productive work. The students can create and practice their own dialogues. They may design any other situations in which they may use the words of making apologies in their daily life or studies, especially the situations that may take place at other parties. Encourage some pairs to act out their dialogues in class.

HOMEWORK:

1.《课课练》配套练习。

2.整理笔记

教后小记

Period 3 Part one Reading comprehension

Table manners at a dinner party

Teaching aims:

1. To get the students to understand and compare the differences of table manners between China and Western countries after reading the passage Table manners at a dinner party.

2. To improve the students’ ability of reading comprehension through reading activities and grasp the spirit of the reading passage.

Background knowledge:

China dining custom &Table manners

The main difference between Chinese and Western eating habits is that unlike the West, where everyone has their own plate of food, in China the dishes are placed on the table and everyone shares. If you are being treated by a Chinese host, be prepared for a ton of food. Chinese are very proud of their culture of cuisine and will do their best to show their hospitality.

And sometimes the Chinese host use their chopsticks to put food in your bowl or plate. This is a sign on politeness. The appropriate thing to do would be to eat whatever it is and say how yummy it is. If you feel uncomfortable with this, you can just say a polite thank you and leave the food there.

Eating No-no’s

Don’t stick your chopsticks upright in the rice bowl. Instead, lay them on your dish. The reason for this is that when someone dies, the shrine to them contains a bowl of sand or rice with two sticks of incense stuck upright in it. So if you stick your chopsticks in the rice bowl, it looks like the shrine and is equivalent to wishing death upon a person at the table!

Make sure the spout of the teapot is not facing anyone. It is impolite to set the teapot down where the spout is facing towards somebody. The spout should always be directed to where nobody is sitting, usually just outward from the table.

Don’t tap on your bowl with your chopsticks. Beggars tap their bowls, so this is not polite. Also, when the food is coming too slow in a restaurant, people will tap theirs bowls. If your are in someone’s home, it is like insulting the cook.

Drinking

Gan Bei !(Cheers!)

Alcohol is a big part of eating in Beijing. Especially when dining with Chinese hosts, you can expect the beer to flow freely and many beis to be ganed. (Gan Bei literally means “dry the glass”.) Besides beer, the official Chinese alcoholic beverage is bai jiu, high-proof Chinese liquor made from assorted grains. There are varying degrees of bai jiu, and some are quite good. The Beijing favorites is called Er Guo Tou, which is a whopping 56% alcohol. More expensive and less formidable are Maotai and Wuliangye, which go far about 300-400 yuan per bottle. In comparison, Er Guo Tou costs a modest 4 or 5 yuan per bottle. If you are not a drinker, or don’t feel up to the challenge, just say “wo bu hui he jiu”(I don’t drink.) It is generally acceptable to use coke or tea as an alcohol substitute.

Suggestions for teaching:

1. Important and difficult points:

To enlarge the students’ knowledge about politeness and impoliteness at table.

2. Suggested teaching methods:

A. Pre-reading

Activity 1: Lead in

Revise how to make apologies in different situations. Make the students know how to use

polite expressions properly.

Activity 2: Discussion

Discuss how to be polite in the following situations in Chinese culture:

Greeting your teacher /Receiving a birthday present /Paying a visit to a friend’s house

Discuss how to be polite at a dinner party.

During the discussion, encourage the students to express themselves freely in class. In the second part of this activity, the teacher may lead the students to say out how to talk to others, how to eat, how to get the food he or she wants to eat , and so on.

B .Reading

Activity 1 Skimming

Ask the students to skim the text to find the main idea of each paragraph.

Para. 1: What are included in table manners in Western countries.

Para. 2: How people start their dinner party.

Para. 3: Information about the main course.

Para. 4: How to communicate with others at the party.

Para. 5: The way of drinking.

Para. 6: The importance of table manners.

Activity 2: Scanning

Ask the students to read the text carefully and do questions and answers. This time they should pay more attention to details.

Questions:

1. What are the devices for eating at a Western dinner party mentioned in the passage?

Knives, forks, napkins, glasses, bread roll and spoons.

2. Where do we put the napkin?

On the lap.

3. What does the dinner start with?

Starter.

4. Is it good manners to eat before others start eating?

No, it isn’t.

5. How much soup can we drink after the starter?

One bowl, no more.

6. What is considered to be the best part of the main course in Western countries?

Chicken breast with its tender white flesh.

7. How much shall we eat at a dinner party?

Not more than we need.

8. What’s the difference of toasting in China and in Western countries?

In Western countries people sip each time, while in some parts of China people finish the whole drink each time.

9. Do we have to follow these rules whiles dining with family members of friends?

No, we don’t have to. We can be more causal.

Activity 3: Quiz

Decide which of the following behaviors are polite or impolite at a Western dinner party. Put “P” or “I” in the brackets.

( )1.Use the knife with your right hand.

( )2.Put your napkin on your lap.

( )3.Start eating as soon as your food is served in front of you.

( )4.Ask for a second bowl of soup.

( )5.Use your fingers when eating chicken.

( )6.Finish eating everything on your plate.

( )7.Talk loudly while eating.

( )8.Make other people drink more than they can take.

C. Post-reading

The teacher may design the following activity for consolidation:

Activity 1: Retelling (Individual work)

Ask the students to retell the basic table manners in the Western countries, especially how to place and use knives and forks.

Activity 2: Discussion

Questions: In what order will the following dishes be served at a Western dinner party? Put the proper number in the box.

dessert drink main course starter soup

Make the students to number them according to what they have learned in the text: 4-5-3-1-2

Activity 3 Consolidation

Ask the students to give examples of how Chinese table manners change over time. Mainly let them talk about the local table manners at the present time. If possible, compare table manners in different parts of China.

Part two Structure analysis

体裁: 说明文

结构分析

Western dinner party Chinese dinner party

Things napkin, glasses, two pairs of knives and forks,

plates a hot damp cloth, chopsticks, bowl, cup, plate

Serving order starter-soup-main course cold dishes-soup-main course

Drink white or red; take a sip alcohol; finish at once

Rules (not) 1. Ask for a second soup

2. Touch meat on bones

3. Take more food than need

4. Laugh all the time

5. Touch each other’s glasses

6. Drink too much

寓德于教

这是一篇介绍西方餐桌礼仪的说明文。该文分别从对餐具的摆放、餐前礼仪、餐中礼仪、餐桌上的谈话礼仪、饮酒礼仪、餐桌礼仪变迁等几个方面来介绍，比较全面地介绍了西方的餐饮文化。该文不但有利于培养和训练学生的阅读能力，也有利于培养学生跨文化交际的意识和学习英语的兴趣。

写作技巧

该篇文章在写作上具有如下特点：

1. 环环相扣，中心明确

文章第一段先给出餐桌礼仪的定义，然后就中西文化中餐桌礼仪的不同进行了较为详细的对比，并于文章最后说明我们为什么要了解餐桌礼仪作为结论，层次分明，环环相扣。每段的最后一句都给出明确的餐桌礼仪注意事项，但在结尾时对作者提出忠告：不要墨守陈规。

2. 由浅入深，通俗易懂

课文以教人们认识最基本的西餐 “table manners” 为目的，以简洁的文字、直接的表述向人们展示了东西方餐桌文化的区别。文章从最基本的餐具摆放开始，接着介绍了进餐的顺序，中间穿插着相关的餐桌礼仪，还说明了进餐中对言行举止的要求，如：举杯、饮酒等。最后宽慰人们 “table manners”在与时俱进，不断变化。如不懂，没关系，直接模仿主人好了。

HOMEWORK:

1. 复述课文。

2. 准备默写

教后小记

Period 4 Language learning

Teaching aims:

Encourage the students to use these language points both orally and in written form.

Important and difficult points:

1.Word study

1).impression 名词，在句中作“印象”解，也可表示按压所留下的“印痕、痕迹”

如：What is your impression of our city?

First impressions are half the battle. (最初的印象最深)

常见词组：make a good impression 留下好印象

give sb. a good impression 给某人以好印象

give one’s impressions of 陈述自己对……的印象

make an impression on sb. 给某人留下印象

make no impression on sb. 对……无影响

2). unfold 由表示否定的前缀un+fold 组成。表示否定意义的前缀还有：

dis- (disappear, discourage, disappoint)

in-, il-, im-, ir- (independent, informal, illegal, impolite, impatient, irregular)

un- (unknown, unlock, unhappy, unfair)

mis-(mistake, misunderstand, misspell)

non-(nonsmoker, nonstop)

3).finish及物动词，其宾语可以是名词、代词或动名词，不能跟不定式作宾语。

如：She’s finished practicing the piano for today.

类似的有: mind, miss, enjoy, practice, excuse, dislike, suggest, consider, keep, avoid, allow, risk, resist, finish, imaging 等。

如：We suggested having a picnic in Xuanwu Lake this Sunday.

4).follow常用作及物动词，主要表示“跟、跟随”等意思。

如：The students followed the professor into the classroom.

Spring follows winter.

He came into the office, following the boss.

He came into the office, followed by the teacher.

另外，有“遵循，听从，仿效”等意思。

如：You’d better follow the teacher’s advice.

Follow the instruction on the bottle.

The football team will be as follows: Smith…

5).not all/both/every 表示部分否定。其意思为“并不都是”“并不是所有的”

如：Not all birds can fly. 并不是所有的鸟都能飞。

Not both of the answers are right. 并不是两个答案都对。

Not everyone likes the film. 并不是所有的人都喜欢这部电硬。

在部分电影否定句中，not 的位置并不影响句意。如上句也可说成：

Everyone doesn’t like the film.

若表示全部否定要用 none, neither, no 等表示。

如：None of the birds can fly. 这些鸟都不能飞。

Neither of the answers is right. 两个答案都不对。

6).beside/besides

beside 为介词，意思为“在……的旁边”，等于at/by the side of.而besides作介词时意思为“除了……之外”或作副词用，意思是“此外还有。”

如：Put the case beside mine when they are ready.

I have quite a few friends besides you.

It’s too late to go out now, besides, it’s starting to rain.

7).manners/polite

manners 是名词，当作为“礼貌、规矩、礼节”解时，应该用复数形式。

如：Remember your manners; thank your friend when you leave the party.

It is good manners to say hello to each other when we meet.

但作为“方式、方法”解时，只用单数。如果是复数，只是用ways.

It is no use talking about it in this manner.

Nobody likes to talk to him; because he has a very rude manner.

polite则是形容词，意思为“有礼貌的、客气的、有教养的”等

如：Americans are busy; they have no time to be polite.

8).mean to do /mean doing

mean to do 为“打算干某事”

mean doing 的意思则是“意味着、意思是（做某事）”

mean sb to do sth

如：I mean to have a good talk with you about it.

Smoking means buying death with money.

I don’t mean you to punish him this way.

Means 意思是“方法、手段”单复数同形。

常用短语有：

by this means = in this way = with this method

by means of 用……的方法

by no means 决不, 一点也不

by all means = of course = certainly

9).drink to /drink a toast “为……干杯、为……祝酒”,其中to为介词。

如：Let’s drink to your success.

Let’s drink to the happiness of the new couple.

drink a toast 的意思为“祝酒、敬酒”等于动词toast

如：Let’s drink a toast to your health! = Let’s toast to your health.

10).start/start with

start & begin 用法相同，start doing sth = start to do sth

如：He started learning / to learn English when he was only three.

但在下列三种情况下只能用start to do sth.

（1）当主语是物而不是人时；

（2）当start后面的非谓语动词表示心理状态时；

（3）当start 用于进行时态时

如：The water started to boil.

She started to wonder who it would be.

She is starting to prepare for the party.

start with表示“从……开始”

如：A Western dinner usually starts with a small dish called a starter.

We can’t go. To start with, it is too cold. Besides, we don’t have enough time.

2.Analysis of difficult sentences

1. There are two pairs of knives and forks on the table, forks on the left and knives on the right of the plate.

该句是由 “there be + n.”构成的句型，表示“某地有某物”。其用法具有以下两个特点：

1．谓语动词的单复数形式是根据离其最近的主语的单复数而定。

2．常用句型有：

There is no need /reason /time to do sth

2. In China, you sometimes get a hot, damp cloth to clean your face and hands, which, however, is not the custom in Western countries.

该句中的however 是副词，表示转折，需要用逗号将其和句子隔开。

如：I feel a bit tired. However, it’s probably just the weather.

如作连词使用，后面需用形容词和副词的原形形式，引导一个让步状语从句。

如：However late it is, his mother will wait for him.

However rich people are, they always want more.

Feedback

1.Complete the following sentences:

1).The speech _______ _______ _______ _______ on the House.

2.)My home _______ _______ _______ our school.

3).I feel _______ _______ _______tired.

4).His illness _______ _______ a slight cough.

5).He ________ ________ at the meeting yesterday.

6).He _______ me _________help.

7).They were ________ ________when we called.

8).I looked all over the house for that letter, and it was in my pocket _______ _______ _______, while I was searching.

9).Let’s _______ _______ your success.

10).Don’t eat _______ _______, or you’ll get fat.

2.Translate the following sentences into English:

1).他留给我的印象就是他没说实话。

2)人们一般认为抽烟是一种坏习惯。

3)那节课是以一首著名的流行歌曲开始的。

4)他们正在桌子那儿打牌。

5)让我们为彼此的健康干杯。

6)这部车属于史密斯先生，另外他还有两辆车。

Suggested answers:

1. The impression he made on me was that he was not telling the truth.

2. People generally think that smoking is a bad habit.

3. That class started with a well-known pop song.

4. They are at the table playing cards.

5. Let’s drink to each other’s health.’

6. This car belongs to Smith, and he has two others besides.

HOMEWORK:

1．整理笔记，消化巩固。]

2．《学英语》报的配套练习

教后小记

Period 5 Language study

Teaching aims:

1. To review the words and expressions learned in the reading to make sure the students master them.

2. To get the students to master the word formation rules of changing the meaning of a word to its opposite by learning some negative prefixes.

3. To understand the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Attributive Clause.]

Suggestions for teaching:

1. Important and difficult points:

1. Mastering the word formation rules to improve the students’ ability to enlarge their vocabulary.

2. Mastering the Restrictive Attributive Clause and the Non-restrictive Clause.

2.Suggested teaching methods:

1)Word study

Activity 1 Questions and answers

This activity is used as a revision to the reading passage. Tell the students that one of their classmates wants to go abroad to study. Before he leaves, he has some questions to ask us in order to make his stay in a foreign country comfortable.

Questions:

1. When drinking, is it proper to look over or into the cup or glass?

When drinking, look into, not over, your cup or glass.

2. Is it acceptable to smoke at the dining table?

It is unacceptable to smoke before or during a meal.

3. Should I blow on my soup when it is too hot?

Don’t blow on food that is hot. Wait until it cools.

4. Is there a proper way to cut meat?

Stroke the knife toward yourself while cutting meat.

5. Should I use my fingers when I’m eating beef or other meat on bones?

Never use your fingers unless you are eating chicken or other birds.

6. What is appropriate when the meal is finished?

Place your fork and knife parallel diagonally across your plate and don’t push your plate away from you.

When performing this activity, the students are asked to close their books. Collect the answers from the students. If necessary, the teacher may give some hints.

Activity 2 Lead-in

Learn rules of word formation by adding a prefix to the beginning of a word to change its meaning.

A prefix is a group of letters added to the beginning of a word that changes the meaning of the word. The prefixes in-, im-, non-,and un- mean “not” or “the opposite of.’

e.g. Informal means “not formal” and unfair means “not fair”.

Activity 3 Practice

1. Learn the word formation rules first and then finish the exercise below.

Suggested answers:

nonstop; unfold; incorrect; unlucky; impossible

2. Read the passage in the second part about table manners in China and fill in the blanks.

Suggested answers:

damp; custom; dishes; middle; noodles; breast; tender; chopsticks; bones; spoon; spirits; toast

2).Grammar: the Restrictive Attributive Clause and Non-restrictive Attributive Clause

Activity 1 Game-playing

This activity is used as a revision to the attributive clause learned before. When performing this activity, students are asked to close their books. Ask the students to practice attributive clauses in oral.

e.g. A: Please give me the book.

B: Which book?

Make sure that every student gets involved in this activity. Encourage some pairs to act it in class.

Activity 2 Sentence analyzing

Write the two sentences on the blackboard:

1. The man who greeted me is my teacher.

2. John, who greeted me, is my teacher.,

Let the students find out the differences between the two sentences. The teacher may tell the students what restrictive clauses they are in the two sentences.

Activity 3.Grammar teaching

Brainstorm question:

What is the restrictive attributive clause and what is a non-restrictive attributive clause?

Answer:

Restrictive Attributive Clause: The information is necessary to identify which person or something is being described or talked about.

Non-restrictive Attributive Clause: The information isn’t necessary to identify which person or something is being described or talked about. It is extra information that is added to the sentence. Commas are used before and after a non-restrictive attributive clause.

1. Analyze the sentences and information in the part of grammar.

2. Practice the sentence below the form. Remind the students to add commas to sentences with non-restrictive attributive clause.

Suggested answers:

1. I read five pages in the book which is about how to study English every evening.

2. The car which my uncle bought two weeks ago was stolen.

3. Paula, whose parents have gone abroad, lives alone on the fourth floor?

4. My sister Ellen, who is warm-hearted, is a nurse.

5. This morning, Andrew, whose old teacher retired, told me about his new teacher.

6. The meeting will be held in the dining hall, where we often have parties at weekends.

7. My father works for a company which produces computers in a big city.

8. Lisa will always remember her childhood, when she stayed with her grandparents.

Activity 4 Consolidation

1. Practice

Underline all the attributive clauses in the reading passage

2. Summary

Repeat the differences between the restrictive attributive clause and the non-restrictive clause in oral.

Extension:

限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的区别

1.限制性定语从句在形式上不用逗号与句子隔开，是先行词不可缺少的定语。如去掉，主句则失去意义或意思表达不完整。翻译时译成先行词的定语“……的”

如：Her brother who is now a soldier always encourages her to go to college.

All the books that have pictures in them are well written.

2.非限制性定语从句在形式上用逗号与主句隔开，是对先行词意义的补充说明。如去掉，主句仍能表达完整的意思，通常译成主句的并列句。

如：Her bother, who is now a soldier, always encourages her to go to college.

All the books, which have pictures in them, are well written.

3.在关系词的使用上，有以下三个区别：

1. 在限制性定语从句中做宾语时可以省略,而在非限制性定语从句中则不可省略;

2. 在限制性定语从句中可用that, 而在非限制性定语从句中不可用that;

3. 在限制性定语从句中可用who代替whom,而在非限制性定语从句中不可用who代替whom;

Feedback

1. 将下列各组句子改写成一个含定义从句的复合句.

1. The car belonged to Paul. It crashed into me.

2. We are moving to Manchester. Manchester is in the northwest.

3. The woman is very friendly. She lives next door.

4. She was engaged to a soldier. She had met him at Dartmouth.

5. We have only told the people. Their work is relevant to this project.

6. This happened in 1977. I was still a baby at that time.

2. Translate the following sentences into English:

1. 他是个对什么都不在乎的人。

2. 她就是卖花的那位姑娘吗？

3. 这是我第一次上学迟到。

4. 你随便什么时候来都行。

5. 我们后来搬到巴黎，在那儿住了六年。

6. 他们邀请我到他们家，这使我非常感谢。

Suggested answers:

1. The car that/which crashed into me belonged to Paul.

2. We are moving to Manchester, which is in the northwest.

3. The woman who/that lives next door is very friendly.

4. She was engaged to a soldier, whom she had met at Dartmouth.

5. We have only told the people whose work is relevant to this project.

6. This happened in 1977, when I was still a baby.

1. He is a man who doesn’t care about anything.

2. Is she the girl who/that sells flowers?

3. This was the first time I had been late for school.

4. Come any time you like.

5. We then moved to Paris, where we lived for six years.

6. They have invited me to visit their home, which is very kind of them.

Homework

1.背诵生词、词组，准备默写。

2.《课课练》的配套练习。

教学小记

Period 6 Integrating skills (Reading and writing)

Teaching aims:

1. To get the students to master what they have learned in this unit.

2. To enable the students to learn how to write thank-you letters.

Suggestions for teaching:

1. Important and difficult points:

1. To know about how to express gratitude by writing thank-you letters.

2. To enable the students to improve their reading and writing abilities.

2. Suggested teaching methods:

A. Reading

Activity 1 Brainstorm

Talk about good manners in Chinese culture. Collect the students’ opinions about good manners in China.

Some basic ones:

1. Get up and give your seat to older people on the bus.

2. Don’t laugh at, stare at or make jokes about disabled people.

3. Don’t start smoking before a dinner is finished.

4. Speak politely, say “please” when you ask for something and “thank you” when you are given something.

5. Say hello to your teachers when you meet your teachers.

Collect more from the students.

Activity 2 Lead-in

Talk about what good manners are if one has enjoyed oneself at a dinner party.

Question: You were invited to a dinner party by David and his wife. You enjoyed yourself very much at the party. What shall you do the next day or some time later?

Collect answers from the students.

篇4：高一英语Unit7 Reading教案(新课标版高一英语教案教学设计)

Teaching Aims:

1. Master the following words and expressions:

restore, replace, recreate, in ruins, under attack, give in ,in pieces, bring…back to life, come true

2. Improve the Ss’ reading ability.

3. Enable the Ss to be aware of the significance of protecting cultural relics.

Teaching key points:

How to improve the Ss’ reading ability.

Teaching difficult points:

1. How to grasp the main idea of a paragraph.

2. How to guess the meaning of new word in the context.

3. How to help the Ss understand the passage deeply.

Teaching aids:

1.a tape recorder

2.a laptop and OHP(overhead projector)

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Revision and discussion

1.T shows some pictures of cultural relics in Jingmen and get them to talk about these cultural relics.

2.T shows more pictures of cultural relics in other cities such as New York, London, Beijing and help the students discuss the Qs in pre-reading.

Qs: What is your favorite city?/What are your favorite cities? Why?

Some cities are called great cities, what makes them great?

How important are the cultural relics?

Step 2 Lead-in

T shows pictures of St Petersburg and say Let’s look at some cultural relics in Russia. What can you see in the picture? (statue, a man on his horse)Do you know who may it be on the horse? (Maybe a very important person such as a king or hero) Tell Ss they are going to learn a passage called ‘a city of heroes.

Step 3 Reading

1. Fast-reading. Let Ss listen to the tape and try to find out the answers to the two Qs:

What does the city in the title refer to?

Who is the man riding the horse?

Teach the pronunciation of St Petersburg and the Russian Czar Peter the Great if necessary.

2. Intensive reading.

T shows pictures of St Petersburg in different times and get the Ss to give a title for them. In this way, Ss will know the structure of the passage .(4 parts including built, destroyed, rebuilt, today)

Para 1 The city was built

Qs: When and where was St. Petersburg built?

What kind of person was Peter the Great?

What did the palaces built look like?

Para 2 The city was destroyed

Qs: Who came to the city in 1941?

What did they do to the city?

What was the result?

What did people of the city determine to do at that time?

Para 3 The city was rebuilt

Qs: When did people begin to rebuild the city?

What did people use to help them rebuild the city?

What was difficult for the people to rebuild the city?

Is the city as beautiful as before after it was rebuilt?

Para 4 The city today

Qs: Who was the hero on his bronze horse?

Who are the modern heroes of Russia today?

3. In paragraph 4, T helps Ss have a deeper understanding of the title by comparing ‘ hero’ to ‘heroes’ ,’St Petersburg’ to ‘Peoplesburg’. If possible, ask them why St Petersburg is called ‘a city of heroes’ in order to make Ss understand the spirit of the people in St Petersburg----patience, devotion and love for cultural relics

Step 4 Practice

T ask the Ss to finish T or F exercise on their books.

T or F:

1. ( F ) The city of St Petersburg was rebuilt by Peter the Great.

2. ( F )The Germans attacked St Petersburg a hundred years ago.

3. ( T )A portait of Peter the Great was destroyed by the Germans.

4. ( T )It was difficult for people to rebuild the old palaces.

5. (T )Workers and painters used old photographs to help them rebuild the city.

6. ( F )St Petersburg will never be as beautiful as it was before.

Step 5 Interview

T gives Ss two situations and ask them to choose one of it to prepare an interview in pairs.

Situation 1: Suppose you are a foreign reporter and your partner is a citizen of St Petersburg. Prepare an interview talking about the city’s history.

Situation 2: Suppose you are Peter the Great. You come back to St Petersburg by time machine and want to know the changes of this city from your partner who is a citizen. Prepare an interview talking about the city’s development.

Step 6 Homework

T shows pictures of cultural relics in danger and ask Ss to write a passage about how to save or protect them.

Leaning Tower of Pisa( in Italy) Abu Simbel (in Egypt)

The Sphinx (in Egypt) Yuanmingyuan

篇5：Unit 5 Modern hero(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Teaching aims:

1. Topic

The qualities of a great person;

The lives of some great people.

2. Useful words and expressions:

hero quality willing active republic principle fight peaceful prison prisoner period law advise continue fee gold youth league stage vote position accept violence equal blanket degree guard educated terror fear cruelty reward right(n.) criminal leader president sentence(v.) sincerely

lose heart in trouble worry about out of work Youth League as a matter of fact blow up put… in prison come to power set up be sentenced to

3. Functional items:

A. Giving opinions:

Why do you think so?

What do you think of …?

What’s your opinion?

I agree/ don’t agree.

I think/don’t think….

I prefer….

In my opinion….

I’m afraid…

B. Making comments:

Good idea!

That’s an excellent idea.

4. Structures

The attributive clause (II)

由where, when, why, 介词+ which, 介词+ when 引导的定语从句。

The school where I studied only two years was three kilometers away.

This was a time when you had got to have a passbook to live in Johannesburg.

The reason why I got a job was because of my hard work.

…we were put in a position in which we had either to accept we were less important, or fight the Government.

The person to whom you should be grateful for a peaceful South Africa is Nelson Mandela.

Teaching procedures

Period 1 (Reading)

Step 1. Warming up

1. Ask Ss some questions:

What are the qualities you should find in a great person?

Who do you think is a great person?

What qualities do you have?

2. Ss finish the chart on page 33.

Step 2. Pre-reading

1. Show Ss some pictures about six great persons and let them guess who they are.

2. Ask Ss to tell why they are important persons in history.

Step 3. While-reading

1. First reading: Ss read the text and finish comprehending 1 on page 35.

2. Ss read again and make a timeline of Elias’ life until he met Nelson Mandela.

1940______________ 1942 ______________

1944 ______________ 1946 ______________

1948 ______________ 1950 _______________

1952 ______________ 1954 _______________

3. Ss read the whole passage and see how many parts the text can be divided into, and give the general idea of each part.

Suggested answers:

Part I paragraph 1-2

The life of Elias’ before he met Nelson Mandela.

Part II paragraph 3-5

The change of Elias’ life after he met Nelson Mandela and what Mandela did.

Step 4. After-reading

Ss discuss:

How the ANC Youth League fights the Government?

What can we learn from the text about Nelson Mandela?

Step 5. Extensive reading

Get the Ss to learn more about Nelson Mandela.

Ss read the passage: the rest of Elias’ story on page 38, and answer the following questions:

1. When did Elias lose his job?

2. Does Elias like his present work?

Homework

1. Recite the key sentences in the text.

2. Retell the text.

Period 2. (language learning and grammar)

Step 1. Revision

Ss try to retell the text, using their own words.

Step 2. Language points

1. The time when I first met Nelson Mandela was ….

2. advise…on

3. be …away

4. Less important than…

5. Only then did we decide to… (倒装句)

Step 3 discovering useful words and expressions

1. Ss read Elias’ story again and try to find words that mean the same in the form on page 35.

2. Ss read the passage on page 36, part 2 and try to complete the it with proper words.

Step 4. Grammar: The attributive clause

1. Ss read the following sentences and try to find the rules.

The mines where I got a job were 9km from my home.

The reason why I got a job was because of my hard work.

The time when I joined the ANC Youth League was late at night.

The government building where we voted was very grand.

The date when I arrived was the 5th August.

2. Practice: Ss finish the sentences on page 36, part 2.

Step 5. Practice

1. Ss do Wb using structures: exercise 1.

2. Ss do the exercise 2 on page 71, join two sentences into an attributive clause.

Period 3. Speaking

Step 1. Revision

Dictation: The teacher speaks the following sentences in Chinese, the Ss write them down in English.

1. The time when I first met Nelson Mandela was a very difficult period of my life.

2. Mandela had opened a black law firm to advise poor black people on their problems.

3. I was worried about whether I would be out of work.

4. We were put in a position in which we had either to accept we were less important, or fight the Government.

5. It was very dangerous because if I was caught I could be put in prison for years.

6. I knew it was to realize our dream of making black and white people equal.

Step 2. Talking

1. Ss answer the question:

What are the qualities you should find in a great person?

2. Ss in groups talk about their hero/heroine on page 69. When they discuss, try to use the following words:

Good idea!

That’s an excellent idea!

I agree/ don’t agree.

I prefer…

In my opinion…

I think/don’t think…

I’m afraid…

Why do you think so?

What do you think of …?

What’s your opinion?

Step 3. Speaking task

Ss in groups and try to finish the speaking task on page 74.

1. Ss read the passage and get to know what they are go to do;

2. Ss in groups and begin to discuss;

3. Ss should take notes while they are talking;

4. Ss should choose one to give a talk to the class.

Step 4. Debating

Ss divide into two parts and debate.

Topic: Mao Zedong is a great person in history.

Mao Zedong is not a great person in history.

Period 4. Extensive reading

Step 1. Pre-reading

Show some pictures and ask Ss to say something about Bill Gates.

T: Do you know who he is?

S: Bill Gates.

T: Who can say something about him?

S: Bill set up his own company “Microsoft”.

He makes most people in the world use the computer.

He makes us learn about the world at home.

T: Do you think Bill Gates a great man?

Ss discuss and answer.

Step 2. Reading

Ss read the passage on page 73 and fill in the information sheet.

Information about Bill Gates

Job

Achievements

What did he give up for his beliefs?

Why does he have enemies?

Why attacked by the government?

Step 3. Discussion

Ss in groups discuss what kind of person Bill Gates is.

Suggested answers:

I think Bill Gates is a great man because he set up the biggest Internet cooperation “Microsoft” in the world. He made a lot of money with his software and gave his millions of dollars to help the education and health of many children around the world. His cooperation also provides a lot of job chances.

Period 5. Listening

Step 1. Using language- listening

Ss are asked to read the questions and multiple answers to find out the listening points first, then listen to the tape three times to choose the best answers and answer the two questions.

Ask the Ss pay much attention to these important points while listening. And tell them to take notes like this:

Passbook: a book…

Underground;

Surface:

Live:

Step 2. Listening

Ss turn to page 69 and listen to the tape three times. Before they listen, ask them to read the questions first.

Step 3. Listening task

1. First listening: Ss turn to page 72 and try to answer the four questions of part 1.

2. Ss listen again and complete the tables of part 2.

3. After listening: if time permits, ask two Ss to answer the question:

Who do you think caused the accident?

Period 6. Writing

Step 1. Pre-writing

1. Ask the Ss to say something about Nelson Mandela.

2. Ss read more about his life.

Step 2. While-writing

1. Ss collect their ideas for the letter. Write them down in order.

2. Ss begin the letter with their address and the date. They may begin like this:

Dear president,

I am writing to ask you to free Nelson Mandela. Here are some reasons why I think he should be free….

3. Finish the letter like this:

Yours sincerely,

(Your name)

4. Choose some Ss to read their letters.

篇6：unit 8 Reading sports(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

江苏省奔牛高级中学英语组王芳

Step 1 Review words

Step 2 Can you list some names of sports?

(weightlifting gymnastics shooting sailing horse –riding volleyball badminton shot put judo golf hockey marathon long-distance softball skiing gymnastics ring side-horse men-single rowing throwing boxing rugby )

Step 3 You know so many kinds of sports. I’m sure you also know a lot of players from China and from other countries.

Step 4 We have talked a lot of sports and players and do you know the important sports events ?

(a; Asian Games ; the 14th Asian Games opened in South Korea city of Busan. . The 16-day Games are the biggest sports event in Asia. A total of 686athletes took part in it . China use the Asian Games as good learning experience before their next Olympic Games in Athens , Greece in 2004 . the Asian Games started from Sep29th to Oct15th . The Chinese team got the first prize. And have won about 150 gold medals . the second is Korea and the third is Japan .

b; the 2002 World Cup ; The 2002 FIFA World Cp was held in Korea and Japan from May 31st to June 30th .There are eight groups. And China is in Group C with Turkey, Costarica, and Brazil . The German team got the first prize .

c; the Olympic Games are the most important event in the world . the Games are held every four years . The motto is swifter , higher , and stronger . )

Step 5 Among these events , which is the most important? Of course it is the Olympic Games . So now we will learn a passage about it .

(a; listen to the passage and answer the question .

b; listen again and give some explanation .

c according to the key words , try to retell the whole passage ;

Step 6 Yes, in order to hold the Olympic Games , the country should spend a lot of money to prepare . But it is a rich prize for a country . And the Olympic Games have been held in a lot of countries . Can you tell me in which countries ?

(in 1992, the Olympic Games were held in Barcelona, Spain. In 1996 the Olympic Games were held in Atlanta , USA. In 2000, the Olympic Games were held in Sydney, Australia. In 2004, the Olympic Games was held in Athens , Greece . and in 2008 , the Olympic Games will be held in Beijing , China .On July 13th in Moscow , When the president of the international Olympic Committee announced that the 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing , everyone was excited . We cheered , and celebrated the Great moment .)

Step 7 Can you tell me why can Beijing win the bid for hosting the Games ?Discuss.

(a; China is a peaceful society .

b; The economy has developed in China .

c; The political situation is stable .

d; China is playing a more and more important part in the international affairs .

e; We have promise that we can host a “Green Olympic,” a “hi-tech Olympic ’’and a “people’Olympic ”.

f; All of the people in China support the bid.)

Step 8 Now Beijing is preparing for Olympic Games . Can you tell me what should be done ? discuss.

( a; we should build the Olympic village , the Olympic park , the Olympic Green , hotels , stadiums and so on .

b; we should improve our traffic and build roads, railways , subways and airports .

c; we should improve the system of telecom.

D; we should improve our air quality . )

Step 9 Although the 2008 Olympic Games will be held in Beijing just for 16 days , it can bring a long-term benefit for China . Can you say something about the influence ?

( a; We can earn a lot of money from the tourism .

b; Beijing residents’ living standard will be improved.

c; It is a good opportunity to spread the Olympic spirit to Chinese young generation .

d; China will be known to the World .

e; It can bring a lot of job chances.

F; It can improve the relationship between other countries.

Step 10 Now it is 2004, you are in Grade 1, after three years you will have the college entrance examination ., you will be in the university in 2008. So in that summer what will do? Maybe some students will stay at home to watch the Olympic Games , and some will go to Beijing to Watch the Games , and some will go to Beijing to serve for the Games . That means some will be the volunteers. It is an honourable job.

Let’s wish the Beijing Olympic Games a great success.

Step 11 Homework

write a passage about the Beijing Olympic Games

篇7：Unit 6 good manners5(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Title of the Lesson: Unit Six

Type of the Lesson: New Lesson

Teaching aims:

1. Learn to use functional sentences, key structures and words. Instruct students to read Table Manners at a Dinner Party.

2. Continue to learn the Attributive Clause.

Content of the Lesson:

1. Topic: Good Manners

2. Functional sentences: apologizing and expressing gratitude

3. Grammar: the Attributive Clause

4. Vocabulary: 大纲词汇（33）

课标词汇（3）

Teaching Focus:

Functional sentences and words, which are used to describe manners

Teaching Aids:

Computer, Tape-recorder

Period 1 Warming up & Listening

Teaching aims:

1. Knowing about some expressions of apology.

2. Study the language points concerned with the dialogue.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1, Revision

Revise how to apologize to people.

Question: when we do something wrong, what should we say?

Ask students to make a list of the answers.

Excuse me, I’m sorry, etc

Step 2, Learn the functional sentences.

1. Work in pairs. Let the students to talk about the pictures and complete the dialogue on page 36.

Ask them if they know the word: terribly/ be careful.

2. The teacher checks the answers.

Step 3, Practice

Let students make similar dialogue and act them out.

Step 4: Listening

Listening Cassette Unit 6

1. Go through the task with the students and make sure what to do before you play the tape.

2. Let students check their answers in pairs and then with the whole class.

Period 2 Speaking

Teaching Aims:

1. Study this lesson to improve the students’ speaking ability.

2. The students are trained to explain English words in English.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1, Presentation

T: I’ll show you some pictures in which someone is doing wrong. What should he/she say? What should he/she answer? Make a list of their answers on the Bb.

Ways of making apologies Possible answers

Forgive me. I am very sorry Oh that’s all right

I apologize for… I’m sorry Oh, well, that’s life

I didn’t mean to… It’s OK

Sorry about that No problem

Step 2, Use the functional sentences to make up dialogues according to the given situations.

1. Let the students work in pairs. Read the situations in class and make sure everyone knows what to do.

2. Make dialogues in pairs.

The students make dialogue in pairs, and then ask some pairs to act out their dialogue.

Step 3, Use the functional sentences to make new dialogues in groups of four, they can create some situations for their dialogues.

Step 4, Assignment

1. Preview reading in Unit 6, and answer the questions in Discussion on page 38.

2. Prepare for a dictation of the words in the Unit 6

Period 3 Reading

Teaching aim:

1. Study this lesson to know more about Table Manners at a dinner party.

2. The students are trained to improve their reading ability and comprehension.

Teaching procedures:

Step1, Revision

1. Check the words and expressions.

2. Ask the students to explain the following words in English.

Custom, damp, napkin, behave

Step 2, Pre-reading

Ask students to think of the following situations. Work in groups to write down the rules of being polite in these situations in Chinese culture:

Situation Rules of being polite

At a dinner party

Greeting your teacher

Receiving a birthday present

Paying a visit to a friend’s house

Step 3, Fast reading (P39-2)

Read the text fast and complete the following sentences. In what order will the following dishes be served at a western dinner party. Please number them:

dessert, drinks, main course, starter, soup

Step 4 Detailed reading (P39-3)

Decide which of the behaviors are polite or impolite at a Western dinner party.

1. Use the knife with your right hand.

2. Put your napkin on your right hand.

3. Start eating as soon as your food is served in front of you.

4. Ask for a second serving of soup.

5. Use your fingers when eating chicken.

6. Finish eating everything on your plate.

7. Talk loudly while eating.

8. Make other people drink more than they can take.

Step 5, Reading aloud

1. Play the tape of the text for the students to listen and follow.

2. Check reading. Ask some of the students to read the passage in class.

3. Dealing with language difficulties.

Step 6, Reading comprehension

1. Compare the customs in Western countries with the customs in China. And then complete the chart.

2. Ask some pairs to report their result orally.

In Western countries In China

similarities You should try to speak quietly and smile a lot, but do not laugh all the times.

You shouldn’t talk with your mouth full.

differences

Period 4 Language Study

Teaching aims:

Learn to use the following words and phrases:

behave, custom, start with, drink, serve

Teaching procedures:

1. behave

A. Read the following sentences and find out the different meaning of the word in the sentence situation.

1) He always behaves well in class.

2) She behaves more like a friend than a mother.

3) Children, please behave (yourselves).

4) They got warning to behave.

5) How is your new car behaving?

B. Summary: 1) 2) = act, bear oneself

3) 5) = conduct oneself well, do what is right

6) = machine works well

behavior (n.)

2. custom & habit

A. Compare the meaning of the words, let students tell the similarities and differences of custom and habit according to the sentences.

1) She has the custom of having a walk after dinner.

2) She has the habit of smoking after lunch.

3) She has the habit of resting after lunch

4) It is a Japanese custom to remove one’s footwear before entering a house.

5) Exchanging gifts on Christmas is a special custom in Western countries.

B. Fill in the blanks.

1. I have a ________ of washing face and hands before meals.

2. To shake hands is a ________ in many countries.

3. start with

A. Read the following sentences and find out the different meaning of the word in the sentence situation.

1） We started at 7 o’clock.

2） We must start early.

3） It started to rain.

4） He just started a new job.

5） The car won’t start.

6） I can’t start the machine.

B. Summary: 1) 2) = begin a journey, set off

3) 4) = begin (sth/ to do sth)

5) 6) = cause (machine) to start work

4. drink

Let students look at some sentences to see if they know the different meanings of drink.

1）(n.)

soft drink

a drink of water

Isn’t there any drink in the house?

How about a quick drink..

2) (v.)

Some horses were drinking at a trough.

He drank a pint of milk

Don’t drink and drive.

3) Phrases

drink sb.’s health

drink to sb.’s health

drink a health to sb.

5. serve

Read the following sentence and get the different meanings of this word.

1) He served as a gardener and chauffeur.

He has served his master for many years.

2) He served as a naval officer during the war.

He has served his country well.

3) Have all the guests been served with food and drinks.

Four waiters served lunch for us.

4) Are you being served?

He served some sweets to the children.

5) This packet of soup serves two.

6. Using the new words and phrases to complete the follow passage.

Eating dumplings on Spring Festival is a ________ in China. Last year, my nephew asked his parents to take him to a restaurant to eat dumplings and he promised he would ________ himself. At first they ordered some _________ to _______ with. Then they were _________ some delicious dumplings. My nephew was very happy that day.

Period 5 Grammar

Teaching aim:

Revise the grammar ------ the Attributive Clause

Teaching procedures:

Step 1, Ask students to read some attributive clauses and get some general opinion about the differences between the restrictive attributive clause and the non-restrictive clause. (Textbook Page 41-1)

Step 2, Ask students to do the exercise in pairs. (Textbook Page 41-2)

Step 3, More exercise (Workbook Page 118-1, 2)

Step 4, Ask students to finish checkpoint and make a summary.

Step 5 Ask the students to finish the following exercise to check how well they can use the attributive clauses.

Period 6 Integrating Skills

Teaching aim:

Get students to know how to write a thank-you letter.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1, Reading and writing

1. Read the thank-you letter on page 41 and write in your own words what each paragraph is about.

2. Discuss in pairs.

3. Feedback.

Para,1, Why I write the letter

Para.2, What I am doing

Para.3, What you are doing

Step 2, Word study

Ask students if they understand the meaning of the following words.

think of/ be busy with/ do well in/ wish you all the best

Step 3, Pre-writing

Work in groups of four. Let students choose one of the topics and write a thank-you letter.

Topics: 1. Thank a teacher for his help

2. Thank your parents for their loving support

3. Thank your friend for being a good friend.

4. Thank your classmate for having invited you to his birthday party

Ask one group to read their letter.

Step 4, Writing

The teacher should do the following before the students write a letter:

1. Go over the requirements of writing, and make sure the students know what to do.

2. Tell the students what they should do before writing.

3. Get the students to write their own letters.

4. Do peer evaluation after finishing their letter.

5. Show some letters to the class.

北京十二中常贞丰台分院梁丽冰

篇8：Unit 6 good manners2(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Unit 6 Good manners

Period 3 Reading

TABLE MANNERS AT A DINNER PARTY

Teaching aims:

1. To get students to know more about table manners at a dinner party.

2. To train students’ reading ability and comprehensive ability.

Key and difficult points:

1. To get students to know the difference of table manners between China and Western countries.

2. To learn how to behave well at a formal Western dinner party.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 ------ Leading in

1. Ask students to say something about the tools used in Chinese restaurants and Western restaurants.

(1) What do Chinese eat with? (chopsticks, bowl and spoon)

(2) What do westerners eat with? (plate, spoon, knife, and fork)

2. Ask students to say something about the order of a formal meal in Chinese restaurants and Western restaurants.

(1) What is the order of the Chinese formal dinner?

(2) What is the order of the western formal dinner?

Step 2 ------ Extensive reading

1. Ask students to read the text as quickly as possible and finish two tasks.

(1) The text mainly talks about ____.

A. table manners at home

B. table manners at friend’s home in China

C. table manners at a dinner party

D. table manners at a formal Western dinner party

(2) Do exercise 2 on page 39.

starter --- soup --- main course --- dessert --- drinks

2. Ask students to read the text aloud with the tape and do the exercise 3 on page 39.

(1) Use the knife with your right hand. (P)

(2) Put your napkin on your lap. (P)

(3) Start eating as soon as your food is served in front of you. (I)

(4) Ask for a second bowl of soup. (I)

(5) Use your fingers when eating chicken. (P)

(6) Finish eating everything on your plate. (P)

(7) Talk loudly while eating. (I)

(8) Make other people drink more spirits than they can take. (I)

Step 3 ------ Intensive reading

1. Ask students to read the first paragraph, discuss how to lay the table with the partner, and say out which number stands for.

2. Ask students to find out what should be done at the beginning of the dinner.

(1) Some people pray before they start eating. If you don’t believe in religion(宗教)

You should keep silent for a moment.

(2) If you pay for the bill, (You are the host)

You can say “Enjoy your meal” to each other and everybody starts eating.

2. Ask students to discuss what should be paid attention to when having starter, soup, main course, and drink of a formal western dinner.

(1) Starter (appetizer):

Tips ------

a. You eat with the smaller pair, and you keep the knife in your right hand and the fork in your left.

(2) Soup: meat soup (thick toast)

Tips ------

a. You will get a bowl of soup --- but only one bowl of soup and never ask for a

second serving.

(3) Main course: steak, chicken, shrimp

Tips ------

a. You can use your fingers when you are eating chicken or other birds.

b. Don’t touch beef or other meat on bones.

c. Finish everything on your plate.

d. Don’t take more food than you need.

(4) Dessert: cake, pudding, ice cream, etc

(5) Drinks: soft drinks (non-alcoholic), red wine, white wine (dry, medium, sweet)

Tips ------

a. Glasses should not touch when drinking to someone’s health.

b. The custom of toasting in Western countries is to take only a sip.

c. Don’t drink too much.

Step 4 ------ Summary

1. Ask students to compare the customs in Western countries with the customs in China, and then complete the chart.

2. Ask students to present their results. (optional Homework)

In Western countries In China

Similarities

1. You should try to speak quietly and smile a lot, but do not laugh all the times.

2. You shouldn’t talk with your mouth full.

Differences 1. Take the napkin, unfold it and put it on your lap. 1. Get a hot and damp cloth to clean your face and hands.

2. Glass should not touch. 2. Glass should touch.

3. Take a sip. 3. Finish the drink at once.

Homework ------

1. Think more about the customs in Western countries with the customs in China write a passage.

Self-evaluation ------

篇9：高一上期末词组复习(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

1、喜欢，爱好 2、追寻，寻找 3、为了

4、给某人写短信 5、总共 6、不睡，熬夜

7、发生 8、引进，带来 9、以---- 告终

10、许许多多 11、逃离 12、注意，当心

13、为某人送行 14、另一方面 15、也，而且

16、保护某人 17、母语 18、发生，产生

19、失火 20、仔细检查 21、高度评价

22、省去，遗漏 23、以某人为笑柄 24、神话，童话

25、让步，投降 26、成为废墟，遭到严重破坏

27、使苏醒，使生动 28、拆毁，推翻 29、设立，创立

30、代表，象征 31、因为，由于 32、速滑

33、田径 34、宁愿，宁可 35、参加

36、为----准备 37、每四年 38、与----保持联系

39、要求，需要 40、假设，万一 41、按照，根据

42、接受，接管 43、毁掉，中止 44、主办城市

45、历史上的重要事件 46、一个荒无人烟的岛 47、交通方式

48、为了某人的健康祝酒 49、风流人物 50、试管婴儿

51、care about 52、make oneself at home

53、have a good knowledge of 54、have difficulty in doing sth.

55、get on one's feet 56、travel agent 57、go wrong

58、owe sth. to sb. 59、stay away 60、think highly of

61、in one's opinion 62、under attack 63、change one's mind

64、in modern times 65、do one's best 66、have on effect on

67、be popular among 68、a successful manager

69、survive the crash 70、make fire 71、walk the dog

72、all the way 73、drive sb. crazy 74、flight number

75、an unusual experience 76、think twice 77、the deadline for sth.

78、seize the opportunity 79、meat-eating animals

80、cause trouble for sb. 81、disabled people 82、take a sip

83、on the banks of a river 84、during one's lifetime

85、years of hard work 86、men's table tennis singles event

87、live his dream 88、hold the Olympic Games

89、surf the Internet 90、history-making success

91、every other day 92、build a website

93、air pollution 94、make a good impression

95、take one's place 96、the secret of success

97、outer space 98、life jacket

99、get close to nature 100、paddle down the river

Keys:

1、be fond of 2、hunt for 3、in order for

4、drop ab. a line 5、in total 6、stay up

7、come about 8、bring in 9、end up with

10、a great many 11、get away from 12、watch out

13、see sb. off 14、on the other hand 15、as well as

16、protect sb. from 17、mother tongue 18、take place

19、on fire 20、go through 21、speak highly of

22、leave out 23、make jokes about sb. 24、a fairy tale

25、give in 26、in ruins 27、bring --- back to life

28、pull down 29、set up 30、stand for

31、because of 32、speed skating 33、track and field

34、would rather 35、take part in 36、in preparation for

37、every four years 38、stay in touch with 39、call for

40、in case of 41、according to 42、take over

43、break down 44、the host city 45、important events in history

46、a deserted island 47、means of transportation

48、drink to one's health 49、the modern hero 50、a test-tube baby

51、在乎 52、就像在家里一样 53、对某事很了解

54、做某事有困难 55、站起来 56、旅行社代理人

57、出错 58、归功于某人 59、远离

60、高度评价 61、某人认为，某人的观点 62、遭受袭击

63、改变主意 64、在现代 65、尽最大的努力

66、对----有影响 67、在----中流行 68、一个成功的经理

69、在空难中幸存下来 70、生火 71、溜狗

72、一直 73、使---发疯 74、航班号

75、一段不寻常的经历 76、仔细考虑 77、最后通牒

78、抓住机会 79、肉食动物 80、给---惹麻烦

81、残疾人 82、抿一小口 83、在河岸上

84、在某人的一生之中 85、多年的艰苦工作 86、乒乓球男子单打比赛

87、实现梦想 88、举办奥运会 89、上网冲浪

90、历史性的成功 91、每两天 92、建立网站

93、空气污染 94、留个好印象 95、代替某人的位置

96、成功的秘密 97、外太空 98、救生衣

99、贴近自然 100、顺流而下

篇10：学习手册Unit12 Art and literature(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

●学习目标

Ⅰ.单词和词组

adult,chance,shooting,fight,romantic,adventurous,end,dark,creature,believe,habit,be about to,

stupid,scare,comedy/tragedy,vacation,in trouble,come across,magical,born,logical,work,

announcement,necessary,event,series

Ⅱ.日常交际用语

Which film do you wan to see?

What's it about?

When is the film shown?

How much are the tickets?

It's not expensive.

Ⅲ.语法

复习定语从句。

●学习障碍

1.单词及短语

ending,in trouble,dark,come across,believe in,habit,if only,be about to…when,work,event

2.语法

定语从句。

●学习策略

单词及短语部分

1.in trouble

纵向归纳法：

（1）(be)in trouble 有烦事，有困难，出事

They are in great trouble.

(2)get sb.into trouble 给人找麻烦，使……陷入困境

(4)put sb.to the trouble of doing sth. 麻烦某人做……

He didn't want to put me to the trouble of meeting him at the airport.

(5)take trouble(to do sth.) 费事，费心

It was good of you to take trouble to do the job.

横向比较法：

（1）介词in引起的短语表示状态特征（作表语）。

in surprise,in tears,in cash（用现金）,in power（执政），in high spirits（情绪高昂），in danger,in a bad temper（坏脾气）,in silence,in prison,in sight（在视线之内）

（2）介词at引起的短语,表“处于……状态”。

at work/play（工作中/游戏中）,at table（用餐中）,at war（在战争中）,at sea（在海上）（3）介词on引起的短语也可表状态。

on duty,on business,on holiday=on vacation,on strike（罢工）,on show,on sale,on fire,on purpose（故意地）,on foot,on the contrary（相反地）,on the whole（总的来说）

突破定式法：

You can't imagine the trouble I had________his house.

A.to find B.found C.finding D.find

答案：C 此题是与定语从句一起考查学生的应用能力，在固定搭配“have trouble(in)doing”的基础上，变换了一下考法。

2.dark

纵向归纳法：

横向比较法：

darkness n. 夜色，暗处，黑夜，黑暗

He sat in the darkness for a while.

I couldn't see her face in the darkness.

联系情境法：

It was getting________when I felt my office.It was impossible for me to got home before________.

It was a ________night.There was no moon and I couldn't see the road in the________.

A.dark;darkness;dark;dark B.darkness;dark;dark;dark

C.dark;darkness;dark;darkness D.dark;dark;dark;darkness

答案：D

3.believe

纵向归纳法： (1)相信，认为

I believe your words/what you said/you.我相信你。

He is in/has the habit of rising early.

(2)get/fall into the habit of养成/染上……的习惯

Philip has got into the habit of sitting by his side.

(3)form/develop the habit of…形成……的习惯

(4)break away from/kick a habit 改掉一个习惯

横向比较法：

(1)habit通常指单个人的经常行为

He has a had habit of biting his nails.

（2）custom（习俗）一般指整个社会在一段长时间里的习惯行为

the custom of giving presents at Christmas.

(3)practice指商业或法律上的常规做法

It's now quite common practice for married women not to take their husband's second name.

综合运用法：

Social________are very different from country to country.

A.custom B.habit C.customs D.habits

答案：C

5.if only相当于I wish，但愿……，要是……就好了。（应用于虚拟语气中）

If only he had seen me!

If only I were ten years younger.（虚拟语气中be动词采用were的形式）

横向比较法：

only if（相当于so/as long as）只要……就……（表条件）

You will succeed sooner or later,only if you work hard.

6.be about to do sth.正要（即将）做某事(不与具体的将来时间连用)

He waited until she was about to leave.

横向比较法：

(1)be about to do sth.…when+从句，正要做……这时发生另一件事。

I was about to leave when the phone rang.

（2）be doing…when+从句，正在……忽然……

I was just coming along to see you when I ran into Wilson.

（3）be on the point of doing sth.…when…正要（去做某事）……忽然……

I was just on the point of going when you came in.

7.event n.

纵向归纳法：

（3）incident n.（偶发）事件：Today an incident happened on campus.

●方法实践

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.Last Sunday I________a copy of the English-Chinese dictionary in a second-hand bookstore. A.ran across B.ran after

C.ran out of D.ran up

2.-Will another fifty be enough?

-Just twenty will________.

A.work B.do

C.suit D.fit

3-How did you find him out?

-I________his name by chance（偶然）on a list.

A.came down B.came about

C.came up D.came across

4.-I've decided to spend the summer holidays travelling in Australia.

-OH,________!

A.if only I could go with you

B.what a good news it is

C.how happily I was to hear that

D.what exciting to hear the news

5.Every new________has the possibility of making or losing money.

A.event B.venture

C.adventure D.expectation

6.-The prison was________fire last night.

-Someone must have set fire________it.

A.on;with B.on;to

C.over;with D.over;to

7.How I wish every family________a large house with a beautiful garden!

A.has B.had

C.will have D.had had

8.I know that Bob is not much of a football player,but when it________to maths,he is among the top three in the class.

A.refers B.goes

C.comes D.concerns

9.Unfortunately(=Unluckily),when I dropped in,Professor Li________,so we only had time for a few words.

A.just left B.has just left

C.was just leaving D.had just left

10.-How did it________that all the flowers died?

-I had forgotten to water them.

A.come about B.come back

C.come down D.come from

11.Does the way you thought of________the water clean make any sense?

A.making B.to make

C.how to make D.having made

12.-I'm coming down town.

-Come on.________.

A.I'll give you a lift B.You are welcome

C.Don't do that D.Come with me

13.What way are you thinking of________rid of the flies?

A.to get B.getting

C.being got D.to be getting

14.You have made a few mistakes in your composition but________you have done well.

A.first of all B.on the whole

C.on the other hand D.generally speaking

15.The librarian promised to get the book for me________she could remember who last borrowed it.

A.if only B.in case(万一，以防)

C.ever since D.even if(即使……也)

16.Such good use has been________his spare time________his English has improved a lot.

A.made of;that B.made of;as

C.made in;that D.found in;as

17.We were just________calling you up________you came in.

A.about;when B.on the point of;while

C.on the point of;when D.on the point of;as

18.-Can I help you,sir?

-Yes.I bought this radio here yesterday,but it________.

A.didn't work B.won't work

C.can't work D.doesn't work

19.-Next week we'll have the final English exam.

-Yes?Then,every minute must be made full use________English.

A.of studying B.to study

C.of being studied D.of to study

20.He is much occupied with（忙于）________of state.

A.events B.incidents

C.affairs D.matters.

21.My mother is usually on ________duty in her office every________few days.

A.the;a B./;a

C./;/ D.a;/

22.The harder we study,the more question we think of________.

A.asking B.being asked

C.to ask D.asked

23.-You seem to show interest in cooking.

-What?________,I'm getting tired of it.

A.On the contrary B.To the contrary

C.On the other hand D.To the other hand

24.-How is it that you are late for class again?

-________.

A.By bus and then on foot B.Because I missed the bus

C.Yes,it's quite wrong D.It's far from school

25.-What are you going to do this afternoon?

-I'll probably go for a walk later on________it stays fire.

A.as far as B.so long as

C.even if D.as if

Ⅱ.完形填空

Do you know what kind of things the young people are reading?More and more 1 and parents have noticed another kind of pollution,which comes from the printed papers 2 on streets.

These printed things 3 newspapers but have hardly 4 to do with them,you can only find readin materials badly made up there-some are too strange for anyone to 5 ;others are frightening stories of something 6 .However,many of the young readers are getting interested in such 7 reading,which 8 them what they should pay for their breakfast and brings them nightmares(恶梦)and immoral(邪恶的)ideas in 9 .Homework was left 10 daily games lost.

These sellers shout on streets selling their papers well.The writers,publishers and printers, 11 they are,we never know,are 12 their ill-gotten money(黑钱）.

The sheep-disguised(伪装）wolf's story seems to have been forgotten.Why not 13 this kind of things?Yes, both the teachers and parents have asked each other for more strict control of the young readers.

14 ,the more you want to forbid it, the more they want to have a look at it. 15 you may even find out several children,driven by their curious natures, 16 one patched paper,which has travelled from hand to hand.

It really does 17 to our society.It has already formed a sort of moral pollution.The 18 teachers and parents need more powerful support in their protection of the young generation.At the same time the young 19 need more interesting and healthy books to help them 20 those ugly papers.

1. A.teachers B.writers

C.readers D.students

2. A.found B.sold

C.given D.sell

3. A.appear B.seem as

C.look like D.are

4. A.nothing B.anything

C.something D.everything

5. A.get B.find

C.believe D.know

6. A.too bad B.still worse

C.even better D.very good

7. A.poisonous B.wonderful

C.interesting D.useless

8. A.takes B.uses

C.costs\ D.pays

9. A.use B.turns

C.common D.return

10. A.undone B.unknown

C.much D.less

11.A.who B.what

C.whoever D.making

12. A.using B.making

C.spending D.losing

13. A.allow B.forbid

C.separate D.leave

14. A.Happily B.Luckily

C.Unfortunately D.Badly

15. A.Seldom B.Always

C.Hardly D.Sometimes

16. A.find B.share

C.get D.hold

17. A.harm B.good

C.favor D.wrong

18. A.worried B.puzzled

C.surprised D.excited

19. A.writers B.teachers

C.parents D.readers

20. A.throw B.keep away

C.break off D.get rid of

Ⅲ.短文改错

This is a small village in the east bank of the 1.________

Nile River in Egypt.Most of its buildings are made 2.________

from mud.As the village is rich in natural resources, 3.________

people are satisfying with their life.They always wear 4.________

smile on their faces.The village is praised as happy one. 5.________

Every year many foreigners come there to hold their 6.________

weddings.So the village was called the international 7.________

wedding village.On August 8,every year,hundred of 8.________

couples hold a collective wedding at here.They 9.________

regard the date for a sign of good luck. 10.________

Ⅳ.书面表达

阅读下面对话：

A:Can I have a single room for tonight please?

B:Sorry,Madam.All our rooms are fully occupied.

A:Is there another hotel around here?

B:Yes,just a few blocks away.

A:Could you find out for me whether it has any vacant（空的）rooms?

B:Yes,I'll call them.Well,you are luckly.I've got a room for you.

A:Could you tell me where the hotel is?

B:You turn left and walk four blocks down the street to the first traffic light.You'll see the sign,Smith Hotel.

请根据对话，用第一人称口吻写篇短文，内容包括：1.你想在旅馆租一个房间，但这家旅馆已客满；2.你请求服务员帮助你；3.旅馆服务员是如何帮助你解决困难的。

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习（定语从句）

1.“Who moved my cheese?”,________is a best-selling book,is written by Spencer Johnson. A.which B.that

C.it D.what

2.Beijing government puts more than 1700 million yuan to increase its green space this year,________doubles the money provided last year.

A.as B.while

C.that D.which

3.I lost my way in the complete darkness,and,________matters worse,it began to rain.

A.made B.having made

C.making D.to make

4.The most favourite room is the tidy study with a fireplace（壁炉），________we can watch TV and enjoy the nice scenery outside.

A.where B.when

C.that D.which

5.The British are not so familiar with different cultures and other ways of doing things,________is often the case in other countries.

A.as B.that

C.so D.it

6.Sometimes the earthquake is so violent（猛烈）that it can destroy（摧毁）the whole city,________happened in Tangshan,in 1976.

A.as B.that

C.where D.like 7.Another unmanned spacecraft “Shenzhou Ⅱ”,________China greets the 21st century,

marks new progress（进步）in the century's space program.

A.for which B.from which

C.in which D.with which

8.The passenger was very impolite to the conductor,________of course,made things even worse.

A.who B.whom

C.what D.which

9.-________was it________they discovered the entrance to the underground place?

-Totally by chance.

A.How;that B.What;that

C.When;when D.Where;that

10.After you have used the dictionary,please just put it back________it belongs.

A.where B.to which

C.what D.that

11.Was it in the village________we used to live in________the accident happened?

A.where;that B.which;that

C.that;where D.where;which

12.The artist________the judge gave a prize is the teacher________I have been taught painting for two years.

A.form whom;by whom B.to whom;who

C.from whom;who D.to whom;by whom

13.Is________three hours________the boy________family is poor to come to school on foot? A.it;that;whose B.it;when;that

C.it for;that it takes;whose D.it;that it takes;whose

14.Let's put off the picnic until next week,________the weather may be better.

A.as B.then

C.if D.when

15.The question came up at the meeting________we had enough money to do the research.

A.whether B.that

C.if D.when

16.Jenny,I shall not forget the wonderful days________we spent together before we left that country.

A.in which B.that

C.when D.on which

17.America was________was first called “India”by Columbus.

A.that B.where

C.what D.the place

18.Is there a shop around________I can get a pack of cigarettes?

A.which B.where

C.that D.what

19.Is it the letter that you got yesterday________makes you so sad?

A.which B.what

C.that D.when

20.Is this research centre________you visited the modern equipment last year?

A.when B.that

C.the one that D.the one where

参考答案

Ⅰ.单项选择

1.A run across=run into=come across“偶遇”。

2.B do这里指“行，足够，合适”。

3.D

4.A 此处表达遗憾之情，if only应用虚拟语气。

5.B venture指（商业上的）冒险投资，而adventure只指“冒险”。

6.B be on fire表状态，set sth. on fire=set fire to sth.“纵火”。

7.B with与if only一样从句应用虚拟语气，一般现在时用过去时表达，将来时用would/could+动词原形表达，过去时用过去完成时表达。

8.C come to这里是“谈到，涉及”的意思，refer to“查阅，指的是……”。

9.C be just doing sth.…when+从句。

10.A come about是“发生”的意思。

11.B think of a way to do sth.这里a way位于句首后面是定语从句。

12.A “搭顺风车”。

13.A

14.B on the whole“总的来说”，on the other hand“另一方面”，generally speaking“一般来说”。

15.A if only表“要是……该多好呀！”要用虚拟语气。

16.A “make good use of his spare time…”把good use提前用被动语态。

17.C be on the point of doing sth.(=be about to do sth.)…when+从句

18.D doesn't work 此处强调事实，现在的状态。

19.D

20.C affairs of state（国务）。

21.C on duty（值日），every few days（每隔几天）。

22.C we think of the more question to ask.

23.A on the contrary（相反地），to the contrary（意思相反的，完全不同的）。

24.A 疑问词how就暗示此题强调的是方式，应用方式状语。

25.B so/as long as=only if“只要……就”表条件。

Ⅱ.完形填空

1.A 依据下文可知。

2.B 3.C

4.B 由句意可知。

5.C 太离奇荒唐，令人难以置信。

6.B 与前文对比。

7.A 这种小报称为pollution自然是“有毒或有害的”。

8.C 9.D 10.A 11.C 12.B 13.B 14.C 15.D

16.B 指相互传阅。

17.A

18.A 老师和家长自然要担心。

19.D 20.D

Ⅲ.短文改错

1.in→on in表示“在……范围内”，而这里指村子在尼罗河畔，故应改为on。

2.√

3.from→of 表示“由……做成的”，看不出原材料用be made from,而看得出原材料则要用be made of。

4.satisfying→satisfied 现在分词作形容词，一般用来修饰事物，be satisfied with是固定词组，其主语一般是人。

5.happy前加a one 替代village，有形容词修饰，前面要加不定冠词。

6.there→here 这里用come比用go好。来这里，去那里，动作与方向应搭配一致。

7.was→is 上下文都是用现在时动词作一般的叙述，时态要取得一致。

8.hundred→hundreds hundred,thousand,million等词加s,后面才能跟“of…”短语；如这些词前面有数词，则不能加s,也不要of。

9.at去掉 here,there等副词前一般不能加介词，但from,here,over there等例外。

10.for→as regard…as意为“把……认为是”，是固定搭配。另一同义词组则为take…for。 Ⅳ.书面表达

Last week I went to the city on business.I went into a hotel and asked the servant whether I could have a single room for one night.

Unluckily all the rooms in the hotel were full.Then I asked the servant if there was another hotel nearby.She was very willing to help me.She called another hotel and found a room there.Then she told me to turn left and walk four blocks down the street and the hotel was right at the corner.I thanked her for her help.

Ⅴ.同步语法专项练习

1.A 此题为非限制性定语从句。

2.D

3.D to make matters worse是插入语“更加糟糕的是”。

4.A 从句中缺少地点状语，先行词在从句中作地点状语。

5.A as is often the case as it often happens“情况常常如此！”

6.A 此题为非限制性定语从句，用which和as都可以。

7.D greet the 21st century with…故应用with which。

8.D 此题同样是非限制性定语从句，which代替前面一句话。

9.A 这是强调句的特殊疑问句形式。“It is/was+强调部分+that+其他”。

10.A Put the book where it was是地点状语从句，因where前没有表示地点的先行词，put the book on the desk where it was是定语从句。

11.B 此题是把定语从句和强调句结合起来考查学生的能力。

12.D the judge gave a prize to sb.,I have been taught by the teacher.

13.D “It is three hours that it takes the boy whose family…”。

14.D when引导的非限制性定语从句，先行词在从句中作时间状语。

15.A 此处为同位语从句。

16.B 先行词days在从句中作动词spent的宾语，故应用that或which或省略。

17.C 此题是表语从句，从句中缺主语，故用what。

18.B 此处around作后置定语，修饰shop与后面的从句无关。

19.C “that you got”为定语从句，后面的是强调句。

20.D 注意这种句型的用法。オ

篇11：高一新课标第三模块人教版教案(新课标版高一英语必修三教案教学设计)

1. Unit 1 Festivals around the world

2. Teaching aims of this unit

Talk about festivals and celebrations

Talk about the ways to express request and thanks

Learn to use Modal verbs

Write a similar story with a different ending

3. Sentence patterns:

Request:

Could/ Would you please…?

Could I have…?

Could we look at…?

I look forward to…

May I see…?

Thanks:

It’s very kind of you…

Thank you very much/ Thanks a lot.

I’d love to.

It was a pleasure…

Don’t mention it.

You are most welcome.

4. Modal verbs:

May might, can could will would shall should must can

The first period Speaking

1. Teaching aims:

Vocabulary: take place, lunar, festival, Army Day, Christmas, dress up

Phrases: Would you like … Could I have…?

Might I offer help…? May I see…?

You should try…Could we like at…?

Can you suggest…? We might take…

Teaching Procedures

Step I Leading in

T: Hello, everybody! Welcome back to school! Did you have a good time in your winter holidays?

Ss. Yes. Of course!

T: When did you feel most happy and excited?

Ss: At the Spring Festival.

T: Who can tell us why? Any volunteers?

S1: Because it is the most important festival in our country.

S2: Because I got a lot of lucky money from my parents.

S3: Because I needn’t study at festivals and there was a lot of delicious food to eat. How great.

S4: Because I met my cousins and friends who I hadn’t seen for a long time.

T. Very food! I am glad to hear that. Today we will talk about festivals, which are meant to celebrate important events. Please think about some other festivals. Can you name just a few?

Ss: New year, Yuan xiao festival…

:T: Quite right. That’s called the Lantern’s Festival. How about some other festivals?

Ss: The Army Day, International Labour’s Day, National Day, Tomb Sweeping Festival, Dragon Boat Festival, Mid-autumn Day…

T: You have done a good job, boys and girls! .

Step ⅡWarming –up

Festivals are meant to celebrate important events. Different countries have different festivals. Work in groups and lost five Chinese festivals that you know. Discuss when they take place, what they celebrate and one thing that people do at that time. The first one is given to you as an example.

Festivals Time of year/date What does it celebrate What do people do

Mid-Autumn Festival Autumn/Fall The beauty of the full moon, harvest, time with family and friends Give/Eat mooncakes and watch the full moon with family and friends

Step Ⅲ Pre- reading

Discuss in groups of four

1. What’s your favourite holiday of the year? Why?

2. What festivals or celebrations do you enjoy in your city or town? Do you like spending festivals with your family or with friends? What part of a festival do you like best---the music, the things to see, the visits or the food?

Step ⅣAssignment

1. Consolidation

2. Listening to the material again after class to be familiar with it.

3. Homework: Collect as much information about festivals as possible.

The second period Reading

Teaching Aims

1.Vocabulary: starve, starvation, plenty, satisfy ancestor lamps lead feast bone origin in memory of dress up trick poet arrival national gain independence gather agricultural European custom awards watermelon handsome rooster admire look forward to religious as though have fun with daily

2.To enable the students to know the earliest festivals with reasons for them and four

different kinds of festivals that occur in most parts of the world

3.To enable the students to master some English expressions and phrases about festivals.

4. Teach the basic reading skills: skimming and scanning.

5. Try to compare and make conclusion s of different festivals.

Step ⅠRevision

1. Greetings.

2. Review the new words of this part.

3. Check the students’ homework---festivals

Step ⅡReading

1.Scanning

T: Open your books and turn to page one. I’d like you to do the scanning. Read the text quickly and accurately to get the main idea and answer the 6 questions on Page3.

( Ask the student to look through the questions and then read the text silently.)

( Four minutes later, check the answers with the whole class. Show the suggested answers on the screen.)

2.Intensive reading

( Allow the students to read aloud and carefully this time to understand the main ideas of each paragraph and the important details)

T: Read the text loudly for a second time and them try to tell if these sentences are True or False.

1. The ancient people needn’t worry about their food. ( F )

2.Halloween used to be a festival intended to honor the dead. ( T )

3.Qu Yuan was a great poet who people honor a lot in China. ( T )

4.Mid-autumn Festival is held to celebrate the end ot autumn( F )

5.Easter celebrates the birth of Jesus. ( F )

3.Reading and discussion

T: Read the text a third time and then work impairs to do Exercise 2 on Page 3.

( Let the students have enough time to read the passage carefully and discuss the chart with their partners. Encourage them to expand their answers according to their own experiences.)

4.Explanation

(In this part try to help the students analyse the difficult, long and complex sentences and guess the meaning of the new words; ask them to deal with the language points in the context.)

T: Now I will discuss some important sentences and phrases in the passage.

a. Some festivals are held to honor the dead, or satisfy and please the ancestors, who could return either to help or to do harm.

b. In memory of

c. In India there is a national festival on October 2 to honor Mahatma Gandhi, the leader who helped gain India’s independence from Britain.

d. People are grateful because their food is gathered for the winter, and because a season of agricultural work is over.

e. The most energetic and important festivals are the ones that look forward to the end of winter and to the coming of spring.

f. The country is covered with cherry flowers so that it looks as though it might be covered with pink snow.

The suggested explanation:

a. An attributive clause.

The sentence means people hold some festivals either to show respect to the dead or to make their ancestors happy in case they might come back to do harm.

b. in memory of … serving to recall sb, to keep him fresh in people’ minds.

He wrote a poem in memory of his dearest wife, who died in an accident.

in honor of ( showing great respect or high public regard)

in hopes/the hope of (hoping)

in defence of (defending)

c. a noun phrase followed by an attributive clause as the appositive

d. two clauses for reason

e. energy→energetic adj. ( full of or done with energy)

look forward to ( to is a preposition here.)

devote to, be/get used to, get down to , stick to

e.g. I’m looking forward to hearing from you.

Step Ⅲ Listening

T: Now I will play the tape for you. You can just listen with your books closed or look at your books or read in a low voice together with the tape. It’s up to you. After listening, please write down three things that most festivals seem to have in common.( Comprehending Ex.3 on Page 3).

The third period Learning about language

Teaching aims:

1. Let the students know the usage of modal verbs.

2. Enable the students to recognize the words and expressions in the reading passage according to what mean the same as them.

Step Ⅰ Greeting and Revision

( Ask some students to retell the text we learned .)

StepⅡ. Practicing the useful words and expressions

T: As we know, there are two important kinds of verbs---transitive verbs and intransitive verbs. But many intransitive verbs have the structure “verb+preposition+objects ” Can you give me some examples?

Ss: Sure. Such as look at the picture, hear from my friends, listen to the radio and so on.

T: Ok. Now turn to page 4, Ex. 4. You are to make some sentences of your own, using the words given.

S1. I’m looking forward to hearing form my friend

S2: We are talking about verbs.

S3: Would you like to talk with me?

S4: Who can think of an effective solution to the problem?

S5: Please think about my proposal.

Step Ⅲ Useful Structures

T: Let’s come to the next part. This part is about modal verbs. You are to read the sentences in Ex. 1 and then to find out and write down different sentences with modal verbs form the reading passage and try to explain their meanings. If you have any difficulty in understanding them you can refer to Grammar in Pages 92---94

Step Ⅳ Summing up and home work

T: Boys and girls, today we have practiced useful words and phrases of this unit and the usage of modal verbs. I think it is not easy for you to master them, after class you should review them.

Homework

1. Practice of WBP42EX.1,2,3.

2. Please find out10 sentences with modal verbs, and try to get their meanings.

The fourth period Listening

Teaching aims:

1. Vocabulary: go with, the big bands, musicians, over and over again, for sale, get used to, the winners of this year’s awards for the best costumes

2. Enable the students to know how to get the key words to understand the conversation about the carnival parade, to talk about sth happened and express request and thanks.

Step Ⅰ Revision

After checking the WB Ex. 1,2,3 the teacher ask the students to give examples about modal verbs and try to explain them.

Step Ⅱ Warming up

T: By the way, what’s the topic of this unit?

Ss: Festivals around the world.

T: Would you like to know something more about festivals around the world?

Ss: Of course.

T: Now I will show you several pictures. What’s the festival called?

Ss: Carnival.

T: Yes. This class we will listen to a dialogue about carnivals. First look through the four questions in listening part to find out the listening points.

Step Ⅲ Listening

T: I will play the tape for you twice. Please listen carefully and pay much attention to the important points. For the first time you are to make notes beside the questions. For the second time, you should write down the answers and then check them with your partners.

( It’s important to encourage the students to adapt their present knowledge any

skill to a variety of situations wherever they can. Make sure to allow various

expressions of the answers. Do not demand the same words form all students.)

Step Ⅳ Speaking

This part is intended to give the students the opportunity to practice a telephone conversation using the functional items for requests and thanks. The polite form of English are important and should be practiced in a variety of situations.

Step Ⅴ Listening task

T: There are about 10 minutes left. Let’s come to listening task. Turn to page 43

and look at the pictures. They have something in common. Can you find it out?

Ss: They are all about festivals bout the dead.

T: That’s right. I will play the tape for you. For the first time you should try to

write down the name of the country where the festival are held. For the next two times you should do Ex2. You can make a brief note first and then complete the chart, according to which you can make a report.

The fifth period Extensive reading

Teaching aims:

1. Vocabulary: heart-broken, turn up, keep one’s word, hold one’s breath, drown one’s sadness in coffee, set off for, remind somebody of something,

2. Learn to compare the festivals in China and in western countries.

Step ⅠRevision

Check homework

Step ⅡReading (1)

T: As we know, there are all kinds of festivals around the world. We have talked about two Chinese festivals for the dead. Today we are going ti read a sad story, which is to introduce a cross cultural view of lovers’ festival-Qi Qiao and Valentine’s Day. Now please read it quickly and find out the sentence below are true or false.

The girl Li Fang loved and waited but she didn’t turn up. But he didn’t lose heart.(F….)

Because her most lovely daughter got married to a human secretly, the Goddess got very angry. .(…T.)

Zhinv was made to return to Heaven without her husband. They were allowed to meet once a year on the seventh day of the tenth lunar month, .(F….)

Hu Jin had been waiting for Li Fang for a long time with a gift for him. .(…T.)

T: I think you have got the general idea of the passage. Now please read the passage once more and answer the questions on Page 8.

Some language points:

1. turn up: appear

2.keep her word: keep her promise

3.hold his breath: wait without much hope

4.drown one’s sadness/sorrow in coffee: drink coffee in order to forget the sadness/ sorrow

5.remind sb of sth: make sb think of sth

Step Ⅲ Discussion and writing

T: That’s for the reading part of the passage. Please think about the ending of the story. Are you satisfied with the ending? Different people have different opinions to a matter. Now any one of you have an opportunity to make up an ending to the story. Please engage imaginatively in the story and use your own ideas. Try to use the vocabulary and structures you have learned of you like.

Step Ⅳ Reading(2)

T: Let’s come to another passage about carnival in Quebec. Please turn to Page 44, read it quickly and answer the questions in Page 45. Five minutes for you.

Added material:

Thanksgiving Day

Fourth Thursday in November is celebrated as ‘Thanksgiving Day’ People thank God for his blessings. People can ‘Thank’ friends, foes and anyone for the experiences, happiness and sunshine they bring into their lives. Pilgrims celebrated the first Thanksgiving Day in America during the second winter in the new world. The first winter had been bad as nearly half of the people had perished due to lack of food and bad weather. But the following year, with the help of Indians who showed them how to plant Indian corn, the pilgrims had successful harvest. Governor William Bradford decided that December 13, 1621 be set aside for feasting and prayer. The Indians were invited to share the festival. Since than, Thanksgiving Day is been celebrated in America. However, it was only in 1941, the Congress in a joint resolution named the fourth Sunday in November as the official Thanksgiving Day.

Dating back, it is known that the Council thought to appoint and set apart the 29th day of June, as a day of Solemn Thanksgiving and praise to God for his Goodness and Favour. The First Thanksgiving Proclamation was however on June 20, 1676. The governing council of Charlestown, Massachusetts, held a meeting to determine how best to express thanks for the good fortune that had seen their community securely established. By unanimous vote they instructed Edward Rawson, the clerk, to proclaim June 29 as a day of thanksgiving, It is also known that the Pilgrims set ground at Plymouth Rock on December 11, 1620. Their first winter was devastating. At the beginning of the following fall, they had lost 46 of the original 102 who sailed on the Mayflower. But the harvest of 1621 was a bountiful one. And the remaining colonists decided to celebrate with a feast -- including 91 Indians who had helped the Pilgrims survive their first year. It is believed that the Pilgrims would not have made it through the year without the help of the natives The feast was more of a traditional English harvest festival than a true “thanksgiving” observance. It lasted three days.

Thanksgiving, as we know it today, has come a long way from the Pilgrim's harvest festival in 1621. It is an event that seems, as each year goes by, to reinvent itself and to expand its meaning to larger vistas. Maybe this is the real significance of the occasion; for as we continue to change and grow as a people, there are an increasing number of things for which we can be thankful.

Halloween

The ancient Druids 督伊德教(古代高卢人与不列颠人的一种宗教)的教徒 who inhabited what we now call Great Britain placed great importance on the passing of one season to the next, holding “Fire Festivals” which were celebrated for three days (two days on either side of the day itself). One of these festivals was called Samhain (pronounced Sha-Von) and it took place on October 31 through to November 1. During this period, it was believed that the boundaries between our world and the world of the dead were weakened, allowing spirits of the recently dead to cross over and possess the living. In order to make themselves and their homes less inviting to these wayward spirits, the ancient Celts（凯尔特人）would douse （插入水中, 把弄熄, 弄湿）all their fires. There was also a secondary purpose to this, after extinguishing all their fires, they would re-light them from a common source, the Druidic fire that was kept burning at Usinach, in the Middle of Ireland.

Samhain was considered to be a gateway not only from the land of the dead to the land of the living, but also between Summer and Fall/Winter. For the Druids, this was the last gasp （喘息, 气喘）of summer (it was also the Celtic New Year), so therefore they made sure it went out with a bang before they had to button down （把...弄清楚）for the winter ahead.

They would dress up in bizarre costumes and parade through their villages causing destruction in order to scare off any recently departed souls who might be prowling （巡游）for bodies to inhabit, in addition to burning animals and other offerings to the Druidic deities（神, 神性）. It is also a popular belief that they would burn people who they believed to be possessed, but this has largely been debunked （揭穿, 拆穿假面具, 暴露）as myth.

This tradition was later brought to the North American continent by Irish immigrants who were escaping the Potato Famine in their homeland. In addition to the festival itself, the immigrants brought several customs with them, including one of the symbols most commonly associated with Halloween -- the Jack 'O Lantern.

According to Irish folklore, there once lived a man named Jack who was known for being a drunk and a prankster（顽皮的人, 爱开玩笑的人）. One night Jack tricked the devil into climbing a tree, and quickly carved an image of a cross on the trunk, trapping the devil. Jack then made him promise that, in exchange for letting him out of the tree, the Devil would never tempt him to sin again. He reluctantly agreed, but was able to exact his revenge upon Jack's death. Because of his mischievous ways in life, Jack was barred from entering heaven and because of his earlier trick, he was also barred from hell. So he was doomed to wander the earth until the end of time, with only a single ember（灰烬, 余烬） (carried in a hollowed out turnip.[植]芜箐, 芜箐甘蓝) to warm him and light his way. In Ireland, they originally also used turnips for their “Jack Lanterns”, but upon arriving in the new world, they discovered that pumpkins were abundant and easier to carve out.

Easter

On Good Friday, Jesus Christ was executed by crucifixion. His body was taken down from the cross, and buried in a cave. The tomb was guarded and an enormous stone was put over the entrance, so that no-one could steal the body. On the following Sunday, some women visited the grave and found that the stone had been moved, and that the tomb was empty. Jesus himself was seen that day, and for days afterwards by many people. His followers realised that God had raised Jesus from the dead.

Hot Cross Buns

Hot Cross buns are still made all over England around Easter time. At one time, buns with a cross on them were made all through Lent. They were banned by Oliver Cromwell and brought back again at the time of the Restoration. For a time they were only available on Good Friday but now they can be bought during the month leading up to Easter. Whole meal hot cross buns are becoming more popular each year.

The Easter Egg

As with the Easter Bunny and the holiday itself, the Easter Egg predates the Christian holiday of Easter. The exchange of eggs in the springtime is a custom that was centuries old when Easter was first celebrated by Christians.

From the earliest times, the egg was a symbol of rebirth in most cultures. Eggs were often wrapped in gold leaf or, if you were a peasant, colored brightly by boiling them with the leaves or petals of certain flowers.

Today, children hunt colored eggs and place them in Easter baskets along with the modern version of real Easter eggs -- those made of plastic or chocolate candy.

O-bon Festival

Bon Dance

During o-bon, bon odori (folk dances) are held all over Japan. The kind of dance varies from area to area. People wearing yukata (summer kimono) go to the neighborhood shrine, temple, or park and dance around a yagura (stage) set up there. Anyone can participate in the dance. Join the circle and imitate what others are doing. Awa odori of Tokushima and bon odori at Yasukuni Shrine, Tokyo are very famous.

Also, Toro Nagashi (floating paper lanterns) are held in some areas. On the evening of the 15th, people send off ancestor's spirits with a paper lantern, lit by a candle inside and floated down a river to the ocean. Fireworks displays (Hanabi-taikai) are often held during o-bon. It is a typical Japanese summer scene to see hanabi.

Since o-bon is an important family gathering time, many people return to their hometowns during o-bon. Most businesses are closed during this time. Although it is crowded everywhere, it is common for many people take trips during o-bon, too. The beginning and end of o-bon are marked with terrible traffic jams. Airports, train stations, and highways are jammed with travelers. I recommend you do not travel around o-bon!

Unit2 Healthy eating

Teaching Aims of this unit

1. Talk about healthy eating

2. Making suggestions or giving advice on diet

3. Distinguish the meanings of Modal verbs

4. Make a balanced menu

5. Vocabulary:

6. fiber,digestion,bean,slim,curiosity,lie,debt,glare,limit,benefit,item,protective get rid of, throw away, get away with, tell lies, earn one’s living in debt ,set out run one’s business ,carry on

7. Speaking: Practice talking about your ideas; practice giving suggestions and advice, practice

seeing the doctor.

8. The use o f ought to

The first period Warming up and reading

Step Ⅰ Warming up

Review the words of foods by showing their pictures. First, ask students to list the foods they like best. Then tick off 3 of them they eat most often. Second, show the three groups of foods and see which group their foods belong to. Third, ask the students to tell us in what ways their foods help them grow.

Step Ⅱ Pre-reading

Get the students to discuss the questions with their partners in this part. Then ask them to report their work. This part will help the students understand the text.

T: Please look at the slide show and discuss the questions with your partners. Then I’ll ask you to report your work. Are you clear?

Which food contains more… Examples of foods Answer

Sugar Chocolate or grapes

Cakes or bananas Chocolate

Cakes

Fat Cream or rice

Chocolate or chicken Cream

Chocolate

Fiber Peas or nuts

Pork or cabbage Nuts

Cabbage

protein Potato crisps or ham

Eggs or cream Ham

eggs

Step Ⅲ Reading

Get the students to comprehend the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the students to form a good habit of reading. Give the students a couple o f minutes to look through the whole passage. Tell the students to read the text silently and then ask for the main idea of the text on the slide show with their partners. Encourage the students to express their ideas.

1. Fast reading

In this part ask the students to read the text quickly for the first time and find out the main idea of the text. Then ask them to read the text again carefully to obtain some details. Before reading show the tasks and let the students read the tasks first. This text will help them have a good understanding of the text.

a. The two restaurants supplied the healthy diet.

b. The reason why Yong Hui’s restaurant was so popular with customers.

c. Wang Pengwei found out why he had lost his customers and decided to win them back

2. Careful reading

T: Now it is time for us to read the text carefully and decide which sentences are true. Then correct the false ones. First read the sentences.

a. Usually Wang Pengwei’s restaurant was full of people. (T )

b. Yong Hui served a balanced diet. ( F)

c. Yong Hui could make people thin in two weeks by giving them a good diet. (F)

d. Wang Pengwei’s customers often became fat after eating in his reataurant. (T)

e. Yong Hui’s menu gives them energy foods. (F )

f. Wang Pengwei’s menu gives tem foods containing fiber. (F )

g. Wang Pengwei admired Yong Hui’s restaurant when he saw the menu. (F )

h. Wang Pengwei decided to copy Yong Hui’s menu. (F )

Step Ⅳ Comprehending

By now, the students have had a further understanding of the text. Let the students read the text again and find out the differences between the two restaurant.

T: Now please read the text again and fill in the chart together with your partner.

disadvantages advantages

Wang Pengwei’s restaurant Not giving enough foods containing fiber Provide plenty of energy foods

Yong Hui’s restaurant Not giving enough energy foods Providing plenty of fiber foods

T: Until now we have known what’s wrong with both restaurant. What does it matter if you only eat at one of the restaurant?

S1:…

S2:…

S3:…

T: You all have a point here. But what will they do? We will see it next period. Facing the serious competiton Wang wasn’t lost in sadness and he didn’t quarrel with his competitor either. He went to the library to learn more about healthy eating and made his menu better than Yong Hui’s menu. Do you think we should follow his example?

Ss: Yes.

T: Now let’s deal with some language points. Turn to page 10, let’s look at the sentences:

a. Wang Pengwei sat in his empty restaurant feeling very frustrated.

This sentence means that the second action “ feeling very frustrated” happened together with the main action “sat”. Pay attention to the form (v-ing) of the second action.

b. Nothing could have been better.

This sentence tells us that everything has worked out the way you would like. It’s a sentence that we can use in any situation.

c. He couldn’t have Yong Hui getting away with telling people lies!

This sentence means that he will punish Yong Hui for her telling lies.

Step Ⅴ Homework

1. Try to retell the text.

2. Prepare for the language learning and do Using words and Expressions on WB (Page 49-50)

The second period Language study

Step ⅠRevision

1. Check the students’ homework.

2. Ask some of the students to retell the text.

Step Ⅱ Word study

This part is a consolidation of the words in the text. Ask the students to do the exercise individually.

T: Now please open your books and turn to page 11. Fill in the chart using the correct forms of the words which have the same root. Next activity is to match the definitions with the words we have learnt form the text. I necessary, you can discuss with your partners.

…

Step Ⅲ Grammar

The students will learn the usage of modal verbs. First try to make the students clear the functions of modal verbs, with the help of the practice 1on page 12. Then give them some examples.

T: Please pick out all the sentences containing modal verbs in the text.

a. By lunchtime they would have all be sold---It indicates possibility.

b. His restaurant ought to be full of people.---It indicates possibility.

c. What could have happened?--- It indicates possibility.

d. Nothing could have been better.--- It indicates possibility.

e. Something terrible must have happened if Maochang was not coming to eat with him as he always did.---It indicates guessing.

f. He could not believe his eyes. ---It indicates intension.

g. He wonder if he should go to the library to find out ---It indicates duty.

h. He wouldn’t have Yong Hui getting away with telling people lies!---It indicates intension.

…

Step Ⅳ Homework

1. Review the rules of word formation and the meanings of modal verbs.

2. Prepare the Using Structure on page 50 by making a dialogue in pairs.

The third period Listening

Step Ⅰ Revision

1. Check the using structure on page 50.

2. Ask the students to make a short dialogue in pairs.

Step Ⅱ Listening( using language)

The students will hear what Wang Pengwei did after leaving Yong

Hui’s restaurant. Ask the students to finish the chart and answer the questions.

T: OK. We have studied the text and know neither of the restaurant supplied a balanced diet. Let’s listen to the tape and see how the story went on. Go through the text quickly on page 14.

( Play the tape. Students write down the answers and check the answers with their partners.)

T: Now listen to it again and try to make sure your answers are right.

Energy-giving Body-building Protective

Rice Meat Fruit

Noodles Fish vegetables

Nuts Tofu

butter

Step Ⅲ Listening (WB P48)

The students will heat a conversation between Hong Mei and the doctor. They are asked to do exercise according to the tape.

T: Doctor know that there are illnesses you may get if you do not eat properly. In the following part, we are going to listen to a dialogue. Hong Mei is going to see the doctor. Let’s see how the doctor gives her some advice. Listen carefully and do the exercises.

Red foods: stop (Only a little) Orange foods: be careful( some every day) Green foods: go( more every day)

Butter, cream, nuts, cakes, foods fried in fat Bread, noodles, rice, neat, cheese, egg, tofu All vegetables( potato, cabbage, carrots..)

Step Ⅳ Homework

1. Pre-view the reading(2) and reading task on Page 52. See how the story ended.

2. Find some information about healthy eating on the Internet.

The fourth period Extensive reading

Step ⅠRevision

1. Check the homework

2. Share the information the students have got form the Internet.

Step Ⅱ Pre-reading

Ask the students to read some proverbs and translate them into Chinese.

T: Today we are going to see the end of the story. First, please look at the blackboard and try to translate the proverbs into Chinese.

a. You are what you eat.

b. An apple a day keeps the doctor away.

c. First wealth is health.

The students discuss with their partners.

a. 人如其食.

b. 一天一个苹果,医生不来找我.

c. 健康是人生的第一财富.

Step Ⅲ Reading

The purpose of this reading is to complete the story of Wang Pengwei and Yong Hui and show the students that it is never too late to change bad eating habits and begin afresh. After the fast reading, let the students do the exercises on page 15. Then let them match the words with their definitions.

T: Eating healthily means that no food in itself is good or bad. Eating properly depends on eating the right variety of foods in the right amount. Let’s read the passage quickly and say what they did with their menu.

Ask the students to report their work.

What did they do? Result

Combine their menu and provide a balanced one

1. raw vegetables with hamburgers

2. the boiled potatoes, not fried

3. fresh fruit with ice cream 1. cut down the fat

2. increase the fibre

3. a big success

Then find the words from the text to match the definitions.

Definitions words

Stare angrily or fiercely Glare

Take a long deep breath Sigh

Keep alive in a certain style Earn one’s living

Advantage or profit Benefit

Join or mix together to form a whole Combine

Owe a lot of money In debt

Step Ⅳ Homework

1. Collect eating attitudes from the Internet

2. Practice presenting reasons to support your ideas.

The fifth period Speaking

Step ⅠRevision

Check the students’homework.

Step Ⅱ Warming up

T: Work in pairs to act out the dialogue on page 13. One plays as the role of Jane and the other plays the role of Susan. You are shopping in a supermarket.

First let the students make a good preparation themselves. Then ask several pairs to act out the dialogue before the class. In this part the, try to make the class get active.

Step Ⅲ Talking

If young people are too thin or too fat, it shows that they are not eating a balanced diet. So this exercise is to encourage the students to discuss how their diets may affect their quality of life.

( Divide the class into two groups: team A and team B.)

T: Now team A will take the role o f the patient who is worried about being too fat and has gone to the doctor for advice. Team B will take the role of the doctor and advise the patient how to change his or her diet. Here are some useful expressions. Imagine what you will say to the doctor or patient. Discuss with your group members.

Doctor Patient

What’s the matter? What should I do ?

How long have you been like this? What seem to be the trouble?

I think you ought to.. Do you think you could give me some advice?

Perhaps you should…

I suppose you had better…

Step Ⅳ Speaking task

This is the opportunity for the students to discuss their reaction to the information they have received. It allows students to have their own point of view and to practice explaining why they think as they do.

T: In the reading task we have read two speakers’arguments. Now it is your turn to discuss what you have heard at the meeting in groups of four. Two of ou argue for and two against building the restaurant. The following is useful to you. Please look at the table.

I don’t agree That’s a good idea.

I’m afraid not Certainly/ Sure.

Of course not. All right.

I don’t think so. No problem.

Yes, I think so.

Step Ⅴ Homework

1. Review the sentence structures, new words and expressions.

2. Imagine the old local restaurant has gone. What do you think should be built there. Present the advantages of your idea.

The sixth period Writing and re-viewing

Step ⅠRevision

Check the homework and take a dictation.

Step Ⅱ Writing

This is an opportunity for students to practice their persuasive writing skills and try to encourage others to support their point of view. The idea of a new library is chosen because it would be very useful in a town.

T: You know, we have mad ea decision that we won’t build a Mcdonal’s. But what do you think should be built on the land? Can you write an article to support your idea? Give you 20 minutes and finish your articles. Pay attention to the orders.

1. Describe the new design

2. Draw a plan

3. explain the advantages of your ideas

Unit Three The Million Pound Bank-Note

Teaching aims:

1. Talk about short stories and dramas.

2. Learn how to act out a play

3. Learn how to request and order food

4. Learn noun clauses as the object and predicative

The first period Intensive reading

Step I.Warming up

1.Mark Twain is probably one of the few American writers with whom students are already familiar. This exercise makes the teacher find out how much the students know about this writer and decide how much they need to know about the author before they read the play.

T: Do you know something about the American writer Mark Twain?

Ss: A little.

T: Today we will learn something about this great writer in the American history. Now please read “About Mark Twain” on page 23 so that you can know more about him.

3. Students read the passage about Mark Twain and answer the questions given in the form on page 23.

a. What’s the real name of Mark Twain?

b. When was he born and when did he die?

c. Do you know all the places where he lived?

d. Can you name three of his famous stories?

T: As we know, Mark Twain is known as a humorist during his life. And this is reflected in THE MILLION POUND BANK-NOTE. So, today we will learn some parts of this famous play.

Step ⅡPre-reading

Get the students to discuss the question with their partners and then ask them to report their work. Encourage to express their opinions freely.

T: If a rich person gives you a large amount of money to use as you like, for example, one million pound, what will you do? Why?

( Students have a discussion on this question. Whatever choice students make here, they should be ready to offer their classmates a good reason for it.)

…

T: I think all of you have a good idea. Do you want to know what happened to Henry Adams in THE MILLION POUND BANK-NOTE written by Mark Twain? Have you ever read the story? So this class we will learn the story together.

Step Ⅲ While reading

1. Scanning

Get the students to comprehend the whole scene quickly and accurately and meanwhile help them form a good habit of reading. Give the students some time to read through the scenes and then answer some questions

a. How did Henry Adams come to England?

b. Where did Henry work before? How much did he have?

c. What did the two gentlemen give Henry?

d. When can Henry open the letter.

2. After the students discuss the questions and then check the answers with the whole class.

T: Listen to the tape and try to find out the characteristics of the whole passage.

Ss: This is part of a play. So, the narration is written in the present tense.

T: OK. All of you have done a good job. Next, let’s read the scene again and do some exercises.

Step Ⅳ Post-reading

Do comprehending exercises and explain :

a. a large amount of: a large quantity of; a great deal of

e.g. They bought a large amount of furniture before they moved their new house.

b. make a bet: make an arrangement to risk money, etc. on an event of which the result is doubtful.

e.g. We made a bet on the result of the match.

c. permit sb to do something: allow somebody to do something

e.g. My mother doesn’t permit me to ride in the street after it rained.

d. by accident: as a result of chance

e.g. I only found it by accident.

e. stare at: look at somebody or something with the eyes wide open in a fixed gaze( in astonishment, wonder, fear, etc)

f. to be honest: to tell you the truth; to be frank

e.g. To be honest, I don’t think we have a chance of winning.

Step Ⅴ Homework

1. Review the key sentences in this part

2. Preview the words in the second period.

3. Act out the play in groups

The second period: Acting

Step I Acting

T: Are you ready to act out the play now< class?

Ss: Yes.

T: Good. Let’s welcome the first group and the second group please get prepared.

…

T: Class, we should pay attention to some examples of Mark Twain’s humor in this scene, which will help us better understand the play and act it out more appropriately. Do you agree with me?

Ss: Yes, of course.

Step II Homework

Review what we learned in this unit

The Third period Watching the movie The Million Pound Banknote

Unit 4 Astronomy: the science of stars

Teaching aims:

1. Talk about the science of stars

2. Practise giving instructions

4. Learn to use noun clauses as the subject

5. Learn to write an essay to show your problems and the way to overcome them.

6. Vocabulary: astronomy, atmosphere, violent, explode, surface, disappointed, gradually, cheer, mass, harmful, presence, in time, prevent …from… depend on, now that, get the hang of, break out

The first period Intensive reading

Step Ⅰ Presentation

T: Hello, everyone! Today we will come to Unit 4, Astronomy. Before that I have a question: where do we come from? Or we can say: Who are our ancestors?

S1: Monkeys!

S2: Beijing Ren who lived many years ago.

S3: dinosaurs

…

T: Very good! Do you know what it was like before life appeared on earth?

S4: Full of water…

Bs: I don’t know.

T: Do you want to get more information?

Ss: Yes, we do.

T: Today we will learn something about how life began on earth. Turn to page 25. Let’s come to Warming up first.

Step Ⅱ Warming up

5. Read the three questions, while the students listen and follow.

6. Give the students several minutes to discuss the questions.

7. Collect answers from the class.

8. Check answers while discussing.

Step Ⅲ Pre-reading

Get the students to discuss the questions on page 25 with their partners. Then ask the students to tell their stories. Encourage them to tell different stories, If they don’t know any, tell them some.

T: Now discuss these questions with your partners. Then I will ask some of you to tell us your stories. Are you clear?

Ss: Yes.

a. Do you know each religion or culture has its own ideas about the beginning of the universe? Give an example if you know.

b. Do you know what a scientific idea is?

Read some stories to the students.

Pangu separates the sky from the earth;

The Biblical Account;

India;

Japan;

Europe;

…

Step Ⅳ Reading

1. Scanning

Get the students to read the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the students to form a good habit of reading. Give the students a couple of minutes to look throuth the whole passage. Tell them to read silently and then ask some detailed questions about the text. Encourage them to express their ideas.

T: We are going to learn a passage about how life began on the earth. Now read the text quickly and then answer my questions.

a. What was there on the earth before life began?

b. Why do scientist think there has never been life on the moon?

c. Why do animals first appear in the sea?

d. Why do green plants help life to develop?

e. Why were mammals different from other animals?

Discuss the answers with the whole class.

2. Skimming

In this part, students will read the text again and finish part 1,2,3

T: Now skim the passage fast to finish part1,2,3,4 Then we will check the answers together.

Key to part 1: DBIGEHACFJ

Discuss the rest with the students.

Step Ⅴ Listening

Listen to the tape for the students to follow and have further understanding of the passage.

T: Read after the tape, then answer me some questions with your book closed.

a. How did water come into being on the earth?

b. Why is water important on earth?

Step Ⅵ Language points

T: Turn to page 25. Let’s look at the sentences:

a. It exploded loudly with fire and rock, which were in time to produce the water vapour.

Which leads non-restrictive attributive clause.

in time: sooner or later; eventually

I will see him in time.

In time ( for sth/to do sth): not late

She will be back in time to prepare dinner.

In/out of time: in/not in the correct time

The audience clapped in time to the music.

b. Nobody knew that it was going to be different from other planets going around the sun.

Be different from: not like someone or something else in one or more ways

City life is quite different from country life.

c. Whether life will continue on the earth for millions of years to come will depend on whether this problem can be solved.

To come: serves as attributive

She is the last person to do such a thing.

Depend on: something might only happen or be true if the circumstances are right for it

Our success depends on whether everyone works hard or not.

d. Walking does need a bit of practice now that gravity has changed.

Now that: because of the fact that

Now that I am free, I can enjoy music for a while.

Now that you have grown up, you can decide it by yourself.

Step Ⅶ Homework

1. Retell the passage

2. Remember important language points

The second period Language study

Step Ⅰ Revision

1. Check retelling of the passage

2. Translate the following sentences.

a. 你迟早会成功的.

b. 我的车与你的不一样.

c. 站在门旁边的那个人是谁?

d. 他总是第一个来,最后一个走.

e. 既然你已经长大了,你自己决定吧.

Suggested answers:

a. You will succeed in time.

b. My car is different from yours.

c. Who is the person standing by the door?

d. He is always the first to come and the last to go.

e. Now that you have grown up you can decide it yourself.

Step Ⅱ Word study

This part is a consolidation of the words learnt in this unit. Ask the students to do the exercises individually.

a. Page 27. First let students finish part 1,2

b. Check the answers with the whole class.

c. Give students 3minutes to finish part 3.

d. Let the students read part 4 for a while and finish it.

e. Turn to page 63. First let the students finish 1and 2 and check the answers.

Step Ⅲ Preparation

Show some sentences on the blackboard.

a. A tree has fallen across the road.

b. You are a student.

c. To find your way can be a problem.

d. Smoking is bad for you.

e. “How do you do?” is a greeting.

f. What she said is not yet known.

g. That we shall be late is certain.

h. It’s certain that we shall be late .

T: What part does the underlined part serve as in each sentence? Or find its subject in each sentence.

Step Ⅳ Grammar

1. Give the students some time to find the sentences in the passage. The collect answers from the class.

2. Show typical examples of how to make a subject clause. Guide the Ss to find out what changes we have to make when we make a sentence or combine two sentences using subject clause. Teacher shows the example and Ss write down the sentences.

3. Turn to page 64. Read the following passage quickly and finish the eight sentences.

4. Have a discussion in pairs. The topic is My dream. One talks about the problems in his study or life, another gives some advice. Remind the students to use the following structures

a. My problem is…

b. My trouble is…

c. The question is…

d. My advice is…

e. What I think about it is…

f. The fact is…

g. My suggestion is…

Step ⅤHomework

1. Finish part 3(P23)

2. Finish part 3(P64)

Added material:

什么是黑洞？

就是在宇宙中有那么一些点，这些点的体积趋向于零而密度变得无穷大，由于具有强大的吸引力，物体只要进入离这个点一定距离的范围内，就会被这个强大的引力吸收掉，连光线也不例外。因此任何进入这个范围的物体都无法再逃出来，就是说，没有任何信号能够从这个范围内传出，因此这个范围的界限被称作视界，里面的情形人类无法看到。所以科学家给它起了个名字叫黑洞，英文就是black hole。一颗燃烧尽了的恒星由于自身的重力而不断坍缩，最后就会形成黑洞。

历时30年霍金改观点称黑洞能“吸”能“吐”

从事宇宙黑洞研究近三十年的世界天体物理学泰斗斯蒂芬霍金在前不久承认“黑洞悖论”有误之后，21号，他在爱尔兰都柏林举行的一个学术研讨会上终于就自己的新发现向外界进行了详细阐述。

黑洞是宇宙中引力极强的区域。19世纪70年代，霍金首次提出黑洞能够辐射能量的理论，但是在引入这一理论的同时，霍金也制造了物理学上的一个巨大难题，因为他认为

黑洞辐射不包含以前吸入物质的相关信息，而且随着黑洞的消失，曾经存在的黑洞的相关信息也会消失于无形。这与量子力学中认为物质信息不会完全消失的理论相矛盾。对此，过去近30年来，霍金的解释是：黑洞中的量子运动是一种特殊情况，这种说法受到了许多科学家的质疑。

如今，霍金终于改变了观点，在当天召开的学术研讨会上，霍金说，根据他的最新发现，黑洞并非只是吞噬物质。除了会在星系形成的过程中扮演重要角色外，在经过一段相当漫长的时间后，黑洞也会把一些曾被它吸入的物质信息向外界释放出来。

霍金的最新阐述被不少人称为黑洞理论的一个重要逆转。美国加州理工学院的理论物理学家约翰普雷斯基就是其中之一。20多年前，霍金提出黑洞辐射理论时，普雷斯基就一直坚持物质信息不会完全消失，当时两人还因此打赌。所以，在当天结束演讲后，霍金将一本百科全书赠予普雷斯基，作为打赌输了的代价，而普雷斯基则获得了全场的热烈掌声。

Black holes

(1) What is a black hole? Well, it's difficult to answer this question, since the terms we would normally use to describe a scientific phenomenon are inadequate here. Astronomers and scientists think that a black hole is a region of space (not a thing ) into which matter has fallen and from which nothing can escape---- not even light. So we can't see a black hole. A black hole experts a strong gravitational pull and yet it has no matter. It is only space ---- or so we think . how can this happen?

(2) The theory is that some stars explode when their density increases to a particular point; they collapse and sometimes a supernova occurs. Form earth , a supernova looks like a very bright light in the sky which shines even in the daytime. Supernovae were reported by astronomers in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Some people think that the Star of Bethlehem could have been a supernova. The collapse of a star may produce a White Dwarf or a neutron star--- a star , whose matter is so dense that it continually shrinks by the force of its own gravity. But if the star is very large (much bigger than our sun) this process of shrinking may be so intense that a black hole results. Imagine the earth reduced to the size of a marble, but still having the same mass and a stronger gravitational pull, and you have some idea of the force of a black hole. Any matter near the black hole is sucked in. It is impossible to say what happens inside a black hole. Scientists have called the boundary area around the hole the “ event horizon.” We know nothing about events which happen once objects pass this boundary. But in theory, matter must behave very differently inside the hole.

(3) For example , if a man fell into a black hole, he would think that he reached the center of it very quickly. However an observer at the event horizon would think that the man never reached the center at all. Our space and time laws don't seem to apply to objects in the area of a black hole. Einstein's relativity theory is the only one which can explain such phenomena , so that there is no “ absolute” time and space depend on the position of the observer. They are relative. We do not yet fully understand the implications of the relativity theory; but it is interesting that Einstein's theory provided a basis for the idea of black holes before astronomers started to find some evidence for their existence. It is only recently that astronomers have begun specific research into black holes. In August 1977, a satellite was launched to gather data about the 10 million black holes which are thought t be in the Milky way. And astronomers are planning a new observatory to study the individual exploding stars believed to be black holes.

(4) The most convincing evidence of black holes comes from research into binary star systems. Binary stars, as their name suggests ,are twin stars whose position in space affects each other. In some binary systems, astronomers have shown that there is an invisible companion star, a “partner” to the one which we can see in the sky. Matter from the one we can see is being pulled towards the companion star. Could this invisible star, which exerts such a great force , be a black hole? Astronomers have evidence of a few other stars too, which might have black holes as companions.

(5) The story of black holes is just beginning . Speculations about them are endless. There might be a massive black hole at the center on our galaxy swallowing up stars at a very rapid rate. Mankind may one day meet this fate. On the other hand, scientists have suggested that very advanced technology could one day make use of the energy of black holes for mankind. These speculations sound like science fiction. But the theory of black holes in space is accepted by many serious scientists and astronomers .they show us a world which operates in a totally different way from our own and they question our most basic experience of space and time.

Read the passage carefully and choose the best answer for the following questions

1) Black holes are related to ____

A. geography B. astronomy C. physics D. economic

2) A black hole is ____

A. a dark star B. a large heavenly body

C. a region of space D. a great mass of matter

3) what causes some stars to explode, theoretically speaking ?

A. their density B. their gravity. C. their movement D. their light

4) Scientists call the area around the black hole ____.

A. a White Dwarf B. a supernova

C. the event horizon D. the star of Bethlehem

5) according to Einstein's relativity theory, there is no “absolute ” time and space. Is it true or false?

A. true B. false

6) which of the following statements is not true? The story of black holes in space____

A. is accepted by many serious scientists and astronomers

B. has to some extent been proved by research into binary star system

C. is questioning our basic idea of space and time

D. Sounds like science fiction

7) according to the passage , our earth may be swallowing by the black hole one day, is it true or false ?

A. true B. false

8) according to the passage , the human being one day may make use of the energy of black hole by advanced technology. Is it true or false?

A. true B. false

Unit 5 Canada---The true north

Teaching aims:

1. Talk about the basic information about Canada.

2. Learn how to read a traveling report and use maps.

3. Learn to express locations and directions.

4. Master the noun clauses--- appositive clause

5. Vocabulary: minister, continent, surround, dawn, booth, slightly, settle down, have a gift for, figure out, as far as, all the way, rather than

The first period

Step Ⅰ Revision

1. Check the students’ homework

2. Check the assignment.

Step ⅡLead-in and warming up

Show the students the maple flag and ask them some questions.

T: Do you know which country uses this national flag?

Ss: Canada.

T: What continent is Canada in?

Ss: In North America.

T: How large is it?

Ss: It is the second largest country in the world.

T: Yes. It occupies an area of 9,984,670 square kilometers. It is a bit bigger than China. Which country is its neighbor?

Ss: The United States.

(Show a map of Canada to the students)

T. Right. The United States is . Canada is a beautiful country. First let’s have a quiz and see how much do you know about Canada.

( Give the Ss one minute to finish the quiz.)

T: OK. Time is up. Let’s check the answers.

1.C 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.A

Step Ⅲ Pre-reading

T: Now I want to ask you a question: Do you like travelling?

Ss: Yes.

T: I know most of you do. So have you ever been abroad?

Ss: Yes/No.

T: What’s the longest trip you have ever taken?

…

T: Very good. If we want to make our motherland more beautiful and more developed, we should know more about other countries. Here are two questions, you may ask your partner for answers and give your answers to him/her.

a. If you take a trip to Canada, what do you expect to see?

b. What three words would you use to describe Canada?

(Ask some pairs to tell their ideas to their classmates.)

Step Ⅳ Fast reading

Get the students to read the passage quickly and accurately and meanwhile help the students to form a good habit of reading.

T: Do you feel puzzled when you read the title? What is the true north? Now read the passage and get the general idea of the passage. Underline the main places mentioned in the text.

Give the Ss 5 minutes for reading.

a. What the passage is mainly about?

b. What are the main places mentioned in the text?

c. Draw the traveling route of the two girls on the map.

T: Do you have any difficulty in reading? Now let’s discuss some difficult points together.

Step Ⅴ Homework

1. Remember the underlined sentence.

2. Write a short passage to report what Li Daiyu and Liu Qian saw in Canada.

The second period

Step ⅠRevision

1. Have a dictation.

2. Ask two students to write on the blackboard.

3. Ask one student to make a short report.

Step Ⅱ Lead-in

T: Li Daiyu and Liu Qian were on the train yesterday. The train rushed across the top of the Lake Superior. Which is the next city it runs towards?

Ss: Toronto.

T: Toronto is an important city. It is the finance center of Canada. It has rich popular arts and culture. How much do you know about Toronto?

Ss: There are Chinatowns where you can buy Chinese medicine.

T: Quite right. Do you want to know more about Toronto?

Ss: Yes.

Step Ⅲ Reading

T: Read the passage on 38. In this passage, you can learn a lot about Toronto, and Montreal, which is Canada’s second largest city. I will give you four minutes to read the passage, then answer the questions on 37-38.

Four minutes later, check the answers with the class.

Step Ⅳ Intensive reading(reading task)

T: Read the passage and fill in the chart using the information of the text.

Points in the passage What Beth thought Information in passage

The temperature

How to travel

Holidays

How people live

What the Inuit do

Daylight hours

T: You can have a discussion with your partner.

Step Ⅴ Discussion

T: We have known a lot about Canada. Now let’s compare China with Canada.

Same as China Different from China

Large land Six time area

Weather is different from area to area, long and hard winter No places as hot as south china

Different people speak different languages Canada has two official languages, smaller population

Many rivers and lakes World famous rivers and lakes

Much coal, oil gas and other natural resources Much fresh water, a lot of forest

Step Ⅵ Homework

2. Read the two passages again and find the main characters of Toronto, Montreal and Iqaluit.

3. Read fun reading by yourself.

篇12：模块一第一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)

模块一第一单元

词汇过关

1.重点单词拼写

1) She is 70 years old, and the skin has become l .

2) It is a idea to play football all day without a break.

3) We usually use g , such as waving, nodding our heads, to talk to people who is far away.

4) To avoid this pollution disaster in the future, we should not i it anymore and please try to pay more attention to our atmosphere.

5）Thank you for your c about the matter of the hawkers in Tak Tai Street.

6) The Smiths are tired of moving now and then and when they got to this little town of California, they finally s down.

7) Most of the farmers in my hometown go out to work at dawn and get back at d .

8) Unlike the grown-ups, most of the t in middle schools are more sensitive than rational.

9) Sorry, I’m not so sure. If you could give me some t , perhaps I could know the answer.

10) “Oh, Sam, I’m only having you on. No need to be u .” said

Frodo.

2. 重点词词形变换

1）It would be to demand of a person who is lack of power of

to become a detective. That’s one of the why I think he is more suitable to be a worker. (reason)

2) Joanna is quite angry that she was by the boss in this task. But in fact I think if she thinks so, she is merely for she is completely in of this task. (ignore)

3) No man can imagine the he got when he lost the game. In fact he was a . He had the ability to win, but he was forced to lose the game. It was for him. (suffer)

4) All the members came to an that Kitty had an voice and that only when she to, should we ask someone else to represent our school to take part in the speech contest. (agree)

5) The doctor asked the patient to be confident in his from the disease, for this kind of disease is , and he was strong enough to from it soon. (recover)

6) The new-born baby was an to the family. “And it brings some

cost to the family.” the mother. (add)

7) Though Tom and John are not very , they can in sign language, which is a common method of between the blind. (communicate)

8) Though Shella tried her best to win the praise of the master on , she still failed it. She was so upset that she wandered in the street . (purpose)

9) As far as I’m , the accident is no of mine, but it my friend. (concern)

10) The two claimed to be born in , and that they knew no other language but . (German)

1.短语积累

add up把某物加起来

get sth done 让某事被做

calm down 安静下来；让某人安静下来

be concerned about 关心；担心

go through 经历；遭受；检查；讨论；被通过

set down 放下；记下；让某人下车

a series of 一系列

to do with 处理

on purpose 故意地；有目的地

at dusk 黄昏时

face to face 面对面

no longer 不再

take no notice of 不注意

suffer from 受某事之折磨

get tired of 对某事感到厌烦

have trouble with 做某事有麻烦

at the moment 目前；现在

get along with 与某人相处

fall in love with 爱上某人

make friends with 与某人交朋友

2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中

1) When you these numbers, you will see how many points you have got.

2) Although he is 20 years old now, he still living alone. He even doesn’t know how to wash clothes.

3) Because he of what the teacher said, he didn’t know what he should do.

4) When John and his wife had some arguments, they would sit down together and discuss the problem .

5) Sorry. I didn’t mean to hurt you . I had wanted to throw at the dog.

6) Our parents us all the time while we children seldom take care of them.

7) He was too scared and didn’t know what the accident.

8) At the first sight the boy the pretty girl although he didn’t know whether she loved him.

9) You are a little baby. You must learn to look after yourself now.

10) I too much bad luck. I don’t care to have one more.

重要句型

1. But your friend can’t go until he/she finishes cleaning his/her bicycle.（P1）

not...until……句型：“直到……才”，主句动词一般需要用短暂性动词，如：finish, hand in, die, go, begin等等。

【词汇网络】not...until可以变化为更加地道的英语句型：

Not until...did/will sb do sth

It was/is not until...that sb did/will do sth

即时强化练习：

用not until翻译下列句子，每句至少用三种句式。

1）直到我去到百货商店我才发现没带钱包。

2）直到她的先生消失在她的视线范围之外，她才痛哭失声。

2. It /This/That is (was) the first/second/third/last time that...某人第一（二，三，最后等）次做某事

在此句型中，若主句时态是一般现在时，即用is，以that引导的定语从句常用现在完成时态。若主句时态是一般过去时，即用was，以that引导的定语从句常用过去完成时态。

This is the first time that I have ever enjoyed this kind of food.

这是我第一次吃这种食品。

It was the third time that he had been informed of the change of the meeting.

这是他第三次被告知会议作了改变。

即时强化练习：

翻译下列句子：オ

1) 那已经是我第五次离开家到广州去学习。

2) 这是我第一次有机会跟你们面对面地交流。

目标解读

1. Ignore the bell and go somewhere quiet to calm your friend down.(P1)

calm v. & adj.

1) vt.使平静，使镇静

The nurse calmed the little boy by giving him some candy.

保育员给那小男孩一些糖果，使他安静了下来。

He took a deep breath to calm himself.

他深吸了一口气以使自己平静下来。

2) vi.平静下来，镇静下来

The excited football fans calmed down at last.

激动的足球迷最终平静了下来。

3) adj. （心境）平静的，镇静的，沉着的; (天气)平静无风的；

（时代）和平安宁的

The sea was calm after the storm.

经过这场风暴后，大海平静下来了。

After the storm it became calm again.

暴风雨过后，天气又恢复了平静无风。

He was calm when I told him the bad news.

当我告诉他这个坏消息时，他很平静。

【词语辨析】calm, quiet, still与silent

calm平静的，沉着的。指无风浪的或人心情不激动的。

quiet平静的，安静的。指不吵闹的或心境不烦躁的。

still 静止的，不动的。指（人体等）不运动的。

silent 沉默的，缄口的，寂静的。指不讲话或没有声音的。

【拓展】calm down平静下来，镇定下来（既可作不及物动词短语也可作及物动词短语）

The crying child soon calmed down.

哭闹的小孩不一会就安静下来了。

It was difficult to calm down the football fans.

要使足球迷们平静下来是有困难的。

(注意：前例句的calm是不及物动词，后例句的calm是及物动词。)

2. Add up your score and see how many points you get.

add vt. & vi. 增加：添加；（数字等）加（起来）；补充说

Add more hot water, please. 请多加点热水。

If you add 4 to 3, you’ll get 7. 四加三得七。

Add up these figures, please. 请把这些数字加起来。

I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.

【派生词】addition n. 增加，附加物；adder n. 「计」加法器

【词汇网络】与add 有关的词组：

add sth. to sth. 把……加到（进）……

add to(=increase)增加

add up to共计（无被动语态）；意味着，等于说

add sth. up/ together把……加起来，合计

3. Tell your friend that you concern about him/her.

concern v. & n.

1) vt. to have sth. to do with or relate to 涉及，关系到（一般不用于被动时态）This concerns the healthy growth of children deeply.

这事对孩子们的健康成长关系极大。

2) vt.使担心（挂念），使忧虑（常用于被动语态）

We’re rather concerned about father’s health.

我们相当担心父亲的健康。

3) n. 所关切的事，关心，担心，担忧

It’s no concern of mine. 这事与我无关。

His mother’s only concern was how to make him study even harder.

他妈妈心里想的全是如何使他学习更刻苦。

【词汇网络】有关concern 的短语还有：

with concern 关切地

show concern for sb. 对某人表示关心

have no concern for 毫不关心

as/so far as...be concerned 就……而言

of much concern 很重要，很有关系

of no concern 无关紧要，没有意义

it is no concern of mine/yours. 这不关我（你）的事。

be concerned about (for) 关心，挂念

We are all concerned for (about) her safety. 我们大家都担心着她的安全。

我们需要注意，在这里从中文角度考虑，应该是主动，但是英语中却必须用被动，类似这样常用被动来表示中文的主动意义的词组还有：

be associated with 与……联合、联系

be attached to 附加于、隶属于……

be based on 以……为基础

be composed of 由……

be connected with 与……连结、连接

be divorced from 和某人离婚

be educated from 从学校等毕业

be employed in 从事于……

be engaged to 和某人订婚

be exposed to 暴露于……，面临于……

be faced with 面对……

be fed up 吃得过饱，对……极其厌倦

be honored with／to瞓e（phr．）被授予……；因做……而感到荣幸

be involved in 卷入、陷入……；专心于

be married to 和某人结婚

be prepared to do sth 准备好了去做某事

be rooted in 扎根于……

be set in 以……为背景

be used to＋v－ing（phr．）习惯于……

be hidden in 藏在某地

be dressed in 穿着

be seated 坐在

另外还有表示情感情绪的动词，当表示“感到……”时，用过去分词，这类动词有：amazed，amused, annoyed，astonished，concerned，confused，delighted，disappointed，discouraged, disgusted，distressed，excited，frightened，interested, irritated，moved，pleased, puzzled，relieved，shocked，touched。

4. It was the first time in a year and a half that I had seen the night face to face. (P2)face to face 面对面地，类似的“名词+介词+名词”的结构还有：

hand in hand，手牵手地 arm in arm 手挽手地，

side by side 肩并肩地 mouth to mouth 嘴对嘴地

back to back 背靠背地，背对背地，一个接一个，连续地；

see eye to eye 看法完全相同，完全同意，面对面看着(与see连用)；face to face 面对面地，当面地，对立地；

front to front 面对面地；

hand to hand 短兵相接地，逼近地，肉搏地；

head to head 头对头地，面对面地，促膝地，交头接耳地；

heart to heart 开诚布公地，心连心地，贴心地，推心置腹地，坦率地，诚恳地；knee to knee 膝靠着膝地，促膝地；

man to man 个人对个人地，一对一地，人盯人地，私下地，坦率地，真诚地；nose to nose 面对面地，迎面(相遇)；

shoulder to shoulder 肩并肩地，齐心协力地，互助，一致，团结；

5. I stayed awake on purpose. (P2)

stay vi. & link v.

1) vi. 停留；逗留

The doctor told him that he would have to stay in hospital for another two weeks. ひ缴告诉他，他还得在医院住两个星期。

2) link v.保持，持续不变 (=keep)

How can you stay so cool and calm after such a hot argument?

这样一场激烈的争论过后，你怎么还能保持如此冷静沉着呢？

【词汇网络】系动词的分类记忆：

“变化”类：become，turn, go, get, grow, fall, run, come

“感官”类：feel, smell, taste, look, sound

“显现”类：look, appear, seem

“状态”类：keep, stay, remain, stand, sit, prove

on purpose 故意地；有意地；有目的地

I don’t think he did it on purpose, for he is really a kind person.

我认为他不是故意这样做的，因为他真的是一个好人。

on 在这里表示处于某种状态或在某个方位，类似的短语还有：

on board 乘（车,飞机） on call 听候召唤

on duty 值班 on earth 到底

on fire 着火 on foot 步行

on guard 在岗 on hire 雇用

on holiday 度假 on leave 休假

on one餾 knees 跪下 on one’s way 在……的路上

on purpose 故意 on sale 待售

on shore 在岸上 on time 准时

on the move 行动 on the other hand 另一方面

on the spot 当- on the tip of one’s tongue 快要说出口 on top of 在……的顶部 on watch 值班

6. Make a list of reasons why friends are important to you. (P2)

reason n. & v.

1) n. 「C, U」原因，理由，动机，理性，理智

The reason why (that) she was ill was that she had eaten bad meat.

【提示】reason后的定语从句的引导词是关系副词why 或that，也可以省略。I have a good reason for doing that =I have a good reason to do that.

我那样做是有充分的理由的。

【提示】reason 后的定语常是介词短语for (doing) sth., 或不定式to do sth.

【词汇网络】①for this (that) reason 因为这个/那个原因

②by reason of由于，因为

2) vt. & vi.推理，推究，劝说

We reasoned that he was lying. 我们推断他在说谎。

Finally I reasoned him into /out of accepting the invitation.

最终我说服他接受（拒绝）邀请。

【词语辨析】reason 与cause

reason 侧重指做某事的理由；cause指导致不良后果的起因。

--What’s the reason for your absence?

你为什么缺席？

--The reason for it is that the traffic was heavy.

我缺席的原因是交通拥挤。

The cause of the big fire was his carelessness.

大火的起因是他的粗心大意。

【派生词】reasonable adj. 合情合理的；reasonably adv. 合情合理地；reasoned adj. 合乎逻辑的

其它写出单词意思

add point upset ignore calm concern loose cheat reason list share feeling Netherlands German outdoors crazy nature purpose dare thunder entirely power according trust indoors suffer teenager advice questionnaire quiz situation editor communicate habit

add up calm down have got to be concerned about walk the dog go through hide away set down a series of on purpose

in order to face to face according to get along with fall in love

join in

1、add vt./vi

add up sth. =add sth. up 把…加起来add to sth. 增添、加某事物

add…to… 把…加到…里 add up to=amount to 共计，总计

① If you ____ 5_____3 you will get 8.

② This bad weather ________ our difficulties.

③ His whole school education _______________ no more than one year.

2、point n./v.

There is no point （in） doing sth. 做…没用，无意义

at/on the point of … 就要…的时候point at/to…指向… point sth. at/ towards sb./ th

① 我们正要离开这时你们来了。 We were __________________ leaving when you came.

② 我们赢（输）了5分。We won (lost) the game ____ 5 _________

③ Can you tell us the main _______ of the story?

④ “That’s the man who did it,” she said, ________________ me.

⑤ The robber _______a gun ________ the bank clerk.

3、concern vt./n.

be concerned about/for 关心 as concerns=concerning (prep.)关于

as/so far as…be concerned 就…而言 concerned adj. 有关的担心的

① 就英语而言，他是我们班最好的

_______________________________, he is first in our class.

② I am living in school, and mother _____________________me.

③ He doesn’t bother about things that don’t ____________ him.

④ Present at the meeting were leading members of the departments ____________.

⑤ This book deals with questions _________Anti-Japanese War.

4、share v/n

a) Let Tom play with your toys as well, Clare---you must learn to__

A. support B. care C. spare D. share

b) Culture refers to a group or community ___we share common experiences that shape the way we understand the world.

A. with which B. that C. which D. what

c) 我不得不与家里人共用一个浴室。I have to ___________ the bathroom _________ the rest of the family.

d) 他是唯一的一位与我的观点相同的人。 He is the only person who __________my opinion.

5、reason n.+ for/to do sth. for the reason of….

a) This is the reason ____he explained to me just now.

A. why B. which C. because D. about which

b) The reason _ he is late is _ there was a breakdown on the railway.

A. why; why B. because; that C. that; because D. why; that

c) Give your reason _____changing the plan.

6、go through sth.经历忍受或遭受…；被正式通过或接受;仔细检查；（书）发行次数；用光或消耗…

get through 穿过；（使）通过；使（读）完;接通

a) Two months later, the law _________________.

b) I rang you several times but couldn’t ______________.

c) I have ____________ all my pockets but I can’t find my keys.

d) The dictionary has ____________________ ten editions.

e) When you _____________ with your work, let’s go out.

7、join ; join in ; take part in; attend

a) Will you ________ the lecture on science?

b) Would you like to _______ us ___ playing football?

c) After ____________ the League, he often helps others.

d) She ______________ the music competition.

e) We _______ a country club that year.

f) We’re going to visit the flower show tomorrow. Will you ____ us?

g) The boy ________ the English Evening and had a good time.

h) He didn’t _________ school yesterday because of his illness.

8、Put away the tools after work, will you? ________________

He puts away part of his wages each month. ________________

She put away the idea of going home. ________________

He put away his wife without good reasons. ________________

9、① --- Is it high time we ______ to school?

---Oh, it’s seven o’clock. Let’s go.

A. will go B. shall go C. went D. would go

② 这是她第一次跟英国人交谈

③每次我见到他，他总是在备课。

10、It is/was + 被强调部分+that/who+其他成分

a) It was 8 o’clock _____ I went back home last night.

A. that B. when C. which D. what

b) __________you missed such a fine lecture? A. How it was that B. It was how that C. How was it that D. Was it how that

c) I just wonder _______ that makes you so excited.

A. why it does B. what he does C. how it is D. what it is

d) It was not until she got home __ Mary realized she had lost her keys. A. that B. when C. where D. before

第二单元

词汇过关

1.重点单词拼写

1) I have got three days’holidays I New Year’s Day.

2) She’s busy at p and can’t speak to you.

3) The captain c his army to attack the enemy at night.

4) Don’t respond to any e-mails r personal information, no matter how official they look.

5) I r him as soon as he came in the room， though I hadn’t seen him for years.

6) The new g is made up of ten officials.

7) H difficult the task may be, we’ll fulfill it in time.

8) It is I to turn your back on someone who is speaking to you.

9) He was last seen heading in the d of Miami.

2. 重点词词形变换

1) Everybody laughed, the teacher . (include)

3) Do you like the films by Zhang Yimou?

He is a well-known Chinese . (direction)

4) The police only interview a child in the of an adult. (present)

5) We should study hard for the of China. (modern)

6) These are the world’s leading industrial . (native)

7) Dean’s a really person to have around when things go wrong.

Only Jack is of great at that time.(use)

8) The bag is -it has a hole in it. (use)

9) I’ve known Barbara for years， since we were babies, . (actual)

10) It was a period of population growth. (rapidly)

1. 短语积累

play a role / part in 在……中起作用

be based on 以……为依据

because of 因为

such as 例如，像……这样的

come up 走近

the number of …… 的数量

a large number of 许多

make good full use of 充分利用

2. 用所给短语将下列句子译成英语

1) 运气在他的成功中起了重要作用。(play an important part in)

2) 这出戏以真实故事为基础，很有教育意义。(be based on)

3) 约翰没有出席会议，因为他病了。(because of)

4) 充分利用你所拥有的每一个机会练习讲英语。(make good use of)

5) 今天缺席的学生有五人。(the number of)

重要句型

1.... than ever before 比以往任何时候

即时强化练习：

翻译下列句子：

1) 受到老师激励，我比以往任何暑假都要更加努力工作。

2) 今年的冬天比以往任何时候都冷。オ

2. This is because ……这是因为……

翻译下列句子：

1) 他今天没有来上学，这是因为他病了。

2) 我不要求你按时完成, 这是因为我不想给你太大压力。

3. even if / even though... 即使，尽管

即时强化练习：

翻译下面句子：

1) 即使你不喜欢他，也可客气一点。

2) 即使你不想去，你也应该告诉他一声。

目标解读

1. They are called world Englishes and they include Canadian, British, American and Indian English. （P9）

include vt. 包括，包含

The bill includes tax and service. 账单中包含了税金和服务费。

Your duties include checking the letters and sorting them out.

Ten students took part in the competition, including three girls.

Ten scientists, six women scientists included, were present at the meeting.

【重要提示】including一般位于名词或代词的前面，included则位于名词或代词的后面

【词语辨析】include / contain / hold

include 强调“包括，作为整体的一部分”，侧重范围或整体。

contain 着重“其中包含有”，指在一定范围或容器内容纳某物，侧重包含的内容或成分。

hold 指“能容纳”

The bok contains ten chapters, including American Literature.

This kind of fruit contains lots of vitamin C and B.

这种水果富含维生素C和B。

The hall holds 200 people. 这个大厅能容纳200人。

2. World Englishes come from those countries where English plays an important role as a first or second language, either because of foreign rule or because of its special role as an international language.（P9）

because of 是复合介词，表原因，意为“因为”，后接名词、代词、或宾语从句。because 作连词，后跟句子。以原因状语从句形式表明主句的根本原因。

He was late not only because of his illness but also because he missed the train.

【词汇网络】表示“由于”的短语还有：

thanks to “多亏，由于”，只能作状语

Thanks to your advice, much trouble was saved.

due to 可以作表语，状语，不可位于句首

The accident was due to the storm.

owing to 可以作状语或表语，作状语时常用逗号隔开，作表语相当于due to.

Tom’s failing in the exam was owing to his carelessness

Owing to his careless driving, the accident occurred.

as a result of “由于”，作状语

on account of “因为”，作状语

. Would you please come up to my flat for a visit?(P9)

come up 上来，过来；

A child came up to me and showed me the way to the station. (走近，上来)

The sky was dark blue and clear when the moon came up. (升起)

Your question came up at the meeting. (被提出讨论)

【词汇网络】come up with 想出（计划，答案）

come out 出来，（花）开，出版；结果是

come about 发生

come across 偶然遇见

come along 一起来，一道走；进展；进步

come to 共计，达到

. English is also spoken in many other countries in Africa and Asia, such as South Africa, Singapore and Malaysia.(P10)

【词语辨析】such as, for example

such as 意为“例如，诸如……之类的”，用来列举同类人或事物中的几个。如果要把同类人或事物全部列举出来，用that is或namely。

A lot of things can be recycled, such as waste paper, waste plastic bags, and old batteries.

for example举例说明，列举同类人或事物中的“一个”，作插入语，且用逗号隔开，可位于句首、句中或句末。

Most boys in my class like physics. Tom, for example, shows a special interest in it.

5. Believe it or not, there is no such thing as standard English.(P13)

such与all, no, some, any, few, little, many, much, several, one等词连用时，应位于它们的后面。

There is no such thing as a free lunch.

世上没有免费午餐之类的好事儿。T

here are three such mistakes in your composition.

你的作文中有三个这样的错误。

6. Today the number of people learning English in China is increasing rapidly.(P10)

the number of...表示“……的数量”

a large number of 相当于a good / great many或many，表示“许多的，大量的”其后跟可数名词的复数形式，不可跟不可数名词。如：

The number of trees on the deserted mountain is over 200,000.

在那片荒山上种植的树木数量已超过二十万棵。

A great many (A number of) visitors come to the Palace Museum every year.

每年有大量的游客故宫参观。

其它写出单词意思

elevator, petrol, gas, official, because of, native, apartment, actually, be based on, at present, gradually, Danish, vocabulary, make use of, spelling, fluent, fluently, Singapore, Malaysia, such as, frequent, frequently, usage, African, Spanish, play a part, recognize, accent

be different from, pay a role(part) in, because of, either …or…, in/on a team, the number of/a number of, than ever before, even if, comp up to, over time, communicate with, be based on, make use of, have one’s own identity, such as, Only time can tell, native speaker, as well as, solve a problem, believe it or not, no such a…, all over the world, at the top(bottom) of, pen friends, to this day, sum up, Pardon?, beg your pardon, go abroad, be used for, more of a …, encourage sb. to do sth., work on, feel like sth., from time to time, English-speaking countries, from one…to another, do business, on the air, would like sb. to do, make notes, fight against, keep…a secret, even though, save time(money), a form of…

1. recognize be recognized as 被承认为 recognize sb. to be 承认某人是…

① --- oh, it’s you! I ______ ________ you. ----- I’ve just had my hair cut, and I’m wearing new glasses.

② Though they hadn’t met for many years，they ______ each other at first sight.

③ Lincoln is recognized ____ one of the greatest presidents in America.

2. direction

in all directions 朝四面八方 under the direction of sb = under one’s direction 在某人的指导下 in the direction of 朝着…方向 from the direction of 从…方向 follow/ obey /listen to one’s direction 听从某人的指导

①． The diretion ____ which the president would go was kept secret ____ safety concern.

A.for; over B. from; about C. in; for D. at; as

②． Generally speaking, when ____ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.

A. taking B. taken C. to take D. to be taken

③. she ______ (问了方向) and then tells her friends.

④. Tom went off _____ ______ _______ and Harry in another.

⑤. He did the work ____ _____ _______.(在我的指导下)

3．Command

Command sb to do sth 命令（要求）某人做某事 have a good command of … 对…精通

Command that … (should) + 动词原型

He commanded that all the gates __________.

A. should shut B. would be shut C. shut D. be shut

4． Request

Request sth of/ from sb. 向某人请求某物 request sb to do sth 请求某人做某事 at one’s request 应某人之请求 request that … (should) + 动词原型

①．Visitors ____ not to touch the exhibits.

A. will request B. request C. are requesting D. are requested

②. The old pianist wouldn’t listen to our repeated request that he ____ in public again.

A. play B. played C. would play D. was going to play

③. He came here ____ A.at my request B. by me request C. by the request of me D. for my request

5. contain, include, cover 区别：

Contain 整体包括部分 A contains B A与B 是不同类事物或者一个容器中容纳的东西

Include A includes B A与B是同类事物，常用两种表达方式：including sth/ sb= sb’sth included

Cover 钱够...之用；足以支付

①．---- How come a simple meal like this costs so much?

-----We have ____ in your bill the cost of the cup you broke just now.

A. added B. included C. contained D. charged

② We all went, ______ Mary.= We all went, Mary _______.

③ ----- Will $200 ____ the cost of the damage? ----- I’m afraid not. I need at least 100 more.

④ He was worried, because he lost his bag ______ his passport, ID card and a lot of money.

6. present

at present= at the present time 目前；现在 be present at the meeting 出席会议 present sth to sb 把...赠给某人 present sb with sth 赠给某人某物

①All the people _____ at the party were his supporters.

A. present B. thankful C. interested D. important

②. They ______ a sum of money ____ (赠与) the college in memory of their son.

7. more A than B (A/B: adj.原级/n.) 与其说B不如说A

no more than + num. = only 仅仅

①．More than one ___ the people heart and soul.

A. officials has served B. officials have served C. officials has served for D. officials have served for

②.---- Tom is very stupid. He failed to pass the exam once again. ----- He is ____ than stupid.

A. lazier B. no lazier C. more lazy D. lazier rather

8Come up 上升；上来；被提出 come up with （人）找到或提出（答案或方法等）

Come about 发生 come up to 达到 come across （偶然）遇见；碰到

用come有关短语填空：

①. Would you _________ my flat for a visit?

②. The question _______ at the meeting whether we had enough money.

③. She ____________ new idea for increasing sales.

④. I ________ children sleeping under bridges.

⑤. Can you tell me how the accident _________?

9. because of/ due to（不可放于句首）/ thanks to/ owing to 由于 + n./ pron. /动名词/名词性短语

because + 句子 as a result of 因为...的结果 result in 导致 result from 由...导致填空：

① I didn’t attend the meeting, _________ I was ill.

② He is absent _________ his illness

③ He was ill, __________, he didn’t attend the meeting.

④ His illness ____________ his absence from the meeting.

⑤ His absence from the meeting _______________ his illness.

10. make use of/ make good use of/ make full use of

①If better use ___________ of your spare time, you will make great progress in it.

②she wondered uneasily what use she would ______ ___ this opportunity.

11. the same... as 表示同类的事物 the same ... that 表示同一个事物 the same ... which/ who/ when /where 和...相同的...

①.This pen is not very good; I’d like the same one ______ you are using now.

②.He went back to the same place ______ he had found the ring.

③.The explorer took only such men and things ______ he really needed into the thick forest.

④.I’m lucky enough to find the same knife _____ I lost yesterday.

12. 用because/ why/ that 填空：

① She didn’t study hard. That was _______ she failed in he exam.

② she failed in the exam. That was ________ she didn’t study hard.

③ What caused the accident was _____ the bus was driven too carelessly.

④ The reason _______ he hasn’t come is that he has to send his mother to the hospital.

⑤That is _____ she left her hometown at the age of nine.

第三单元

词汇过关

1.重点单词拼写

1) His paper will be published in the British Medical J next month.

2) We can’t goods in railways.

3) I knew you would be too s to listen to my advice.

4) I I that you go to the hospital immediately; you are very ill.

5) Are you doing the task in the p way?

6) The size of your feet d the size of your shoes.

7) What is you’re a to the idea, agree or disagree?

8) He has a gift for language, and he is f with three languages.

9) He broke the r in high jump in the Asian Games.

10) I was very busy that day, but he p me to take part in the party.

2. 重点词词形变换

1) The of live animals is forbidden. (transport)

2) They scored in the minute of the game. (finally)

3) After a little gentle , Mr.Brown agreed to let us in.(persuade)

4) Her to do well made her keep on studying. (determine)

5) The are all from China. (cycle)

6) The woman showed great in going into the burning building to rescue the trapped child. (brave)

7) The events have been the of conversation for weeks. (topic)

8) The young lady wanted to buy a pair of tennis . (short)

9) Make sure the job is done .(proper)

10) The tourists were caught in the snowstorm in the area. (Tibet)

1.短语积累

keep a travel journal 写旅游日记

see the world through one’s eyes 透过眼睛看世界

agree to sth 同意

on the/one’s journey 在旅途中

as usual 照例；像往常一样

stay awake 保持清醒

keep asking sb. 不断问

one way fare 单程票

at an altitude of 5,000 meters 在海拔5000米的地方

dream about/ of (doing) sth. 梦想做……

graduate from college 大学毕业

persuade sb. to do sth. 劝说某人做某事

get sb.interested in doing sth. 使……对……感兴趣

care about 关心;考虑

a determined look 坚决的表情

change one’s mind / change one’s attitude

change our minds 改变想法

make up one’s mind

make up our minds 决定

give in 投降; 上交

give in to sb. / sth. 屈服；同意……

pass through 穿过

flow through 流经……

make camp 扎营

put up the tent 支帐篷

for one thing,... for another,... 一方面……另一方面……

familiar to sb. 为……所熟悉

in detail 详细地

2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中

1) She being famous one day.

2) The only thing he seems to is money.

3) O’Neil was to pressure from London to hurry the reform.

4) How can we him politics?

5) Kate didn’t want to buy that skirt., it was very expensive;

its style was out of fashion.

重要句型

1. It was my sister who first had the idea to cycle along the Mekong River from where it begins to where it ends.(P18)

此句包含英语中的强调句型：it + is/was + 被强调部分 + that/who + 原句其余部分。要注意：被强调部分表示“人”的话，用that/who, 其他情况下都用that.

It was Jack who/that broke the window yesterday.

即时强化练习:

用强调句型翻译下面句子

1) 我是在那棵树下面捡到这只钱包的。

2) 是他把窗户的玻璃打破的吗？

3) 你是因为什么而没有参加会议的？

2. Are you working this evening?(P21)

此句用现在进行时 are working 来表示按计划进行的将来的动作。

I’m writng the composition at night.お

即时强化练习：

翻译下面句子

今天下午一位美国来宾将在礼堂举行一场英语讲座。

目标解读

1. I have dreamed about taking a great bike trip.(P18)

dream about: 做梦；梦见

I dreamt about you last night.

dream of/about: 梦想，幻想

We dream of buying our own house.

【词汇网络】dream away 虚度（光阴）

dream up 虚构出

have a dream 做梦

2. When we graduated from college, we finally got the chance to do it.(P18)

graduate from : (大学或中学)毕业

Wang Ming graduated from Beijing University with a degree in law.

finally: adv. 最后，终于

final: adj. 最后的，决定性的 n.决赛

【词语辨析】finally, at last, in the end，eventually

finally: 可以表示时间位置，相当于at last / in the end; 还可以表示时间的先后顺序，如同first(ly), second(ly), then, last。

at last: 只指时间位置，强调经过周折、等待、耽误的“最后、终于”出现所期待的结果。

in the end / eventually: 只指时间位置，强调经过周折、等待、耽误的“最后、终于”出现所期待的结果（相当于at last）或者出现非期待的结果。

3. Then she persuaded me to buy one.(P18)

persuade: vt. 说服; 信服

persuasion: n. 说服

persuasive: adj. 有说服力的

persuade sb. to do sth/ into doing sth. 说服某人干某事

persuade sb. not to do sth/ out of doing sth 说服某人别干某事

persuade sb. of sth. 使某人信服

I finally managed to persuade Mary to go out for a drink with me.

Don’t let yourself be persuaded into buying things you don’t really want.

He persuaded me not to go there. / He persuaded me out of going there.

We finally persuaded Ben of the wisdom of this decision.

4....she insisted that we find the source of the river and begin our journey. (P18)

insist: v. 坚持宣称/认为（宾语从句的谓语用陈述语气）；

坚决要求，一定要（宾语从句的谓语用虚拟语气should + v.）

Mike insisted that he was right.

They insisted that everyone (should) come to the party.

【词汇网络】insist on （doing）sth. 坚持

if you insist 如果你一定要这样

Her parents insisted on speaking to the headmistress.

He kept insisting on her innocence.

--Why don’t you call them up today?

--Oh, if you insist

【词语辨析】insist on, stick to

前者表对“要求、意见、看法等”的“坚持”；后者表对“愿望、原则、决定、诺言或某种理论”的“坚持”

5. She gave me a determined look-the kind that said she wouldn’t change her mind. (P18）

1) determine: v. 确定；决定，支配；（官方）确定，规定

determination: n. 决心，（官方）决定

determined: adj.

determine to do sth. 决定做.……

be determined to do sth.有决心干……

We determined to leave at once.

I am determined to find out who is responsible for this.

Determined that his son would do well, Mr.Smith sent him to a private school.

2) change one’s mind（about）改变主意/决定

Try and get her to change her mind about coming with us.

【词汇网络】make up one’s mind (to do sth.) 下定决心做……

be in two minds about 拿不定主意，犹豫不决

set one’s mind on (doing) sth. 下定决心要┳觥…

come to mind 突然想到

put one’s mind to 专心于……

keep one’s mind on 专心于……

keep / bear sth. in mind 记住……

bring / call sth. to mind 回想起……

其它写出单词意思

journal, fare, transport, prefer, disadvantage, fare, flow, cycle, persuade, graduate, finally, schedule, fond , be fond of , shortcoming , stubborn, care about , make up one’s mind , determine, give in , valley, pace, altitude, bend, boil , forecast, parcel, reliable, organize, journey, insurance, wool, as usual, view , pillow, midnight, at midnight, flame, beneath, temple, cave, change one’s mind,

1 imagine

imagine +v-ing

我难以想象我与那种女子结婚后的情形。

I can’t ______ my ______ a girl of that sort。

2 choose （chose ，chosen）

have no choice but to do sth 除了干某事别无选择

She had no choice but ______away 。

A go B to go C going D to have go

3 persuade

Persuade sb to do=persuade sb into doing 说服某人做某事；

persuade sb not to do=persuade sb out of sth/doing 说服某人不要做某事；

Persuade sb of sth =persuade sb 。+that 从句使某人相信；

① While shopping ，people sometimes can’t help ______ into buying sth。 They don’t really need。

A to persuade B persuading C being persuaded D be persuaded

② Alice trusts you，only you can ______her to give up the foolish idea 。

A suggest B attract C attempt D persuade

③猎人劝阻我们不要独自穿越茂密的丛林。

The hunter ______us ______through the thick forest alone 。

4 insist

Insist 表达“坚持主张”时，所跟的宾语从句使用虚拟语气；表达“坚持一种说法，看法或事实”时，宾语从句使用陈述语序和相应的时态。

① I insisted that a doctor ______ immediately。

A has been sent for B sends for C will be sent for D be sent for

② He came to my class every week ，but his attitude ______that he was not really interested。

A expresses B described C explained D suggested

5 determine

Determine + n。/determine to do/ determine +从句

Be determined to do 决心做

determined a。已下决心的（不在名词前）；断然的，决然的

①______ to train his daughter in English， he put an ad like this in the paper。“______ ，an English teacher for a ten-year-old girl ，”

A Determined ，Wanted B Determined ，Wanting C Determine ，Wanted D Determining ，Wanting

②她坚定不移要上大学。

She ______ ______ ______ go to university。

6 fun Make fun of 取笑 for fun 为了高兴，为了好玩

①______ at the seaside ！

A How fun the children had B What a fun the children had C How fun had the children D What fun the children had

② 独自一个人去参加聚会没什么意思。

It‘s not much ______going to a party alone

7 awake

①When do you usually ______ up？

② I s he ______or asleep？

③ He lay ______ all night。

④ They were making enough noise to ______ the dead 。

8 give in屈服投降让步

give away不小心透露，赠送，免费给予 give off 放出，散发（光，热，烟，气，味）give up 放弃，认输 give out vt。分配，分发 Vi。（食物，燃料，电力）用光，精疲力竭

① Never ______ ______ the stugy of English

② Jane tried to keep up a calm appearance ，but her trembling voice ______her ______

③ He may ______to my view

④ It is always the husband who ______ first when quarrel breaks out between the young couple 。

⑤ Her patiece finally ______ ______

⑥ The teacher ______ ______ the exam paper 。

9 for one thing 。。。for another （thing）/besides； on （the ） one hand ，on the other （hand）

for one thing 首先。。。一则。。。，陈述两方面的情况常一致，常与for another （thing）/besides（再者，另一方面）呼应； on （the ） one hand ，on the other （hand）常表达相矛盾的两方面

①______ she‘s well eduacated ，______ she is pretty 。

A On the one hand ，on the other hand B for one thing ，for another

C On one hand ，but also D On the one hand ，on another hand

②Tom works very hard。His brother ，______，does‘t do much at all。

A what‘s more B on the contrary C for one thing D for another

③ ______ ， the hotel is near the sea，but ______it costs a lot。

A On the one hand ，on the other hand B for one thing ，for another

C On one hand ，but also D On the one hand ，on another hand

10 care about 关心，对。。感兴趣；在乎

care for 喜欢，愿意，照顾

① I don‘t ______ what others think

② She doesn‘t ______ skating 。

③ I wonder whether they will ______ us all to go there

④ The captain ______ the safety of the crew。

11 用 cost spend pay take 填空

①It ______ us two hours to finish the work。

② Tom ______a lot of money on books。

③ The new bicycle ______ him 100 dollars

④ Mary ______ 200 dollars for the evening dress

⑤ I‘m ______much more time in listening now

⑥ The money I ______ for the service added up to1000dollars every year 。

⑦ It will ______ you 5dollars to fly to London

⑧ The car ______all his savings

⑨ The man got what he wanted ，which is at a ______of his own life and his family‘s happiness。

第四单元

词汇过关

1.重点单词拼写

1) Before the earthquake, you can notice that the wells have c in them.

2) Before the earthquake the chickens and even the pigs are too n to eat.

3) Two-thirds of the people died or were （受伤）during the earthquake.

4) Older students were having difficulty in studying and o themselves.

5) A great part of the city was d in the earthquake.

6) I felt everything s during the earthquake so I couldn’t sit still.

7) She c her face in her hands and cried loudly.

8) Seeing a baby crying in the burning house, the firemen r her from the house.

9) She is always healthy. Whenever I see her, she looks f .

10) J from his appearance, the manager can’t be over 60.

2. 重点词词形变换

1) Whether the can be separated is not an international affair, but a one. It is up to the people to decide. (nation)

2) Please wipe the off the table. The room looks with

the table. (dirt)

3) Most people protect themselves fromto their self-esteem, for they think if their self-esteem wasgreatly, they will feel. (injure)

4) from the result, the of the match must have controlled the match quite well. Do you agree with my ? (judge)

5) can be found everywhere. Sometimes one’s hair seems . Some equipment can be . (electricity)

6) As , some were wounded when they were trying to find out something of the government .(report)

7) We visited the of Yuanmingyuan last summer. It by the foreign invaders. Seeing the palace we feel very pitiful. (ruin)

8) Taste and are closely connected. If you can’t the food, you can’t taste it either. (smell)

9) The felt happy that they were able to the accident and joked that it was because of the of the fittest. (survive)

10) We all felt to be invited to take the action and we promised on our that we would do it bravely, even if we died . (honour)

1.短语积累

shake hands with 握手

as usual 像往常一样

break out 爆发

right away 马上；即刻

a number of 许多；大量

to the north of 在……北面

put up 举起；张贴

be proud of 对……感到自豪/骄傲

judging from 根据……判断

be known as 作为……而出名

come out of 从……出来

too...to... 太……而不

give out 用完；出故障；分发；宣布

be trapped under the ruins 陷在废墟下

instead of 代替

in honour of 纪念

tens of thousands of 几万

more than 超过；不仅仅

fall down 倒下

at an end 结束；终结

dig out 挖出；查明

wake up 醒来

in ruins 严重受损；破败不堪

2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中

1) A terrible earthquake hit the city and in a few seconds the whole city lay .

2) It’s a custom others when they meet in China, while in Japan they bow to each other.

3) following his father’s advice, Jack did just the opposite, which made his father angry.

4) from his expression, he must have won a prize.

5) The whole class the boy student who won the first prize in the English Contest, for he was the honor to their class.

6) The children were busy a tent and it would be completed before dark.

7) Meizhou the Capital of Hakaees, for there are most Hakaees living there.

8) The monument (纪念碑) was set up those who died in the terrible disaster.

9) The monitor helped the teacher the graded test papers.

10) The terrible shaking of the building all the people who were sleeping.

重要句型

1. What do you think may happen before an earthquake? (P25)

疑问词 + do you think/suppose + 陈述句语序的句子？

When do you think he will arrive here?

你认为他什么时候能到这里？

シ译下列句子：

1) 你认为是谁拿走了我的雨伞？

2) 你想我们什么时候来制定计划？オ

2. It seemed that the world was at an end! 似乎是世界末日！（P26）

It seems/appears/happens + that从句 “似乎/碰巧……”

=Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to do sth 某人似乎/碰巧要做某事。

Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to be doing sth 某人似乎/碰巧在做某事。

Sb/sth seem/appear/happen+to have done sth 某人似乎/碰巧做过某事。

It seems that we will have a hard time. = We seem to have a hard time.

似乎我们将要过一段艰难的时光。

翻译下列句子：

1) 似乎他从未思考过这样的问题。

2) 碰巧当时大家都在室外干活。

目标解读

1. For three days the water in the village wells rose and fell, rose and fell. (P26)

rise：

1) vi. 上升

The sun rises in the east and sets down in the west.

起立；起床

Knowing that she wouldn’t help, he rose and set off for home.

知道她不帮忙，他站起来回家了。

增长

The cost in supporting a family is rising quickly recently.

维持一个家庭的费用近来迅速地增加。

2）n. 上升；上涨；升起

a rise in price 价格的上涨

give sb. a rise 给某人提工资

at the rise of the sun 日出之时

【词语辨析】rise与raise

(1) 两者都可表示“升起”之意，这时rise是不及物动词，而raise是及物动词。The price of meat has risen sharply lately.

最近肉价上涨很快。

The butchers will raise the price of meat in a few weeks.

肉商几个星期内将提高肉价。

(2) 表示“起立、起床、增长”时只能用rise。

Although very tired, when hearing the alarm, he rose from the bed quickly.

虽然很累，当听到闹钟响起时，他迅速地从床上爬起来。

(3) 表示“饲养、提出”时要用raise。

He is just the person who raised such a good plan.

正是他提出了这么好的计划。

2. Two thirds of the people died or were injured during the earthquake. (P26)

injure 受伤；伤害

He was badly/seriously injured in the accident.

他在事故中严重受伤。

Drinking too much surely will injure one’s health.

喝太多酒当然会伤害到一个人的健康。

injured adj. 受伤的

injury n.伤口；受伤处

【词语辨析】injure: 受伤

wound: 受伤（一般强调外伤）

harm: 意指无形的伤害，“对……有害”

hurt: （肉体或精神上的）伤害，强调疼痛

Don’t often listen to the loud music. It will harm your hearing.

In the modern war, not many soldiers were wounded or killed.

Your words really hurt him a lot.

He fell from the second floor and was badly injured /hurt.

3. In the farm yards, the chickens and even the pigs were too nervous to eat. (P26)

too...to... 太……以至不能……。例如：

The boy is too weak to lift the heavy box．

这男孩太虚弱，举不起那个重箱子。

当too...to...跟少数形容词（如ready,glad,pleased,apt,willing,inclined，eager, easy, satisfied等）搭配时，不定式无否定意义。例如：

He is too ready to promise．他轻于许诺。

Beginners are too apt to make mistakes．初学者极易出错。

He is too much inclined to give himself airs．

他太喜欢装模作样了。

需要注意的是，too... to... 的否定形式not too... to... 的意思是“不是太……而不能”。例如：

He is not too young to dress himself．

他不是小得连衣服都不会穿。

It is never too late to learn．活到老，学到老。

too还因此形成一类特殊而重要的用法，具体如下：

cannot（或can never）... too... 表示“怎么……也不会过分”、“越……越好”的含义。如：

One can never be too careful in one’s work．工作越细越好。

One cannot be too careful in making the decision as it was such a critical case．

因为这是一个如此重要的问题，所以在做出决定时无论怎样谨慎都不过分。 You cannot praise the play too highly．

这出戏你无论怎样称赞都不会过分。

4. But one million people of the city, who thought little of these events, went to bed as usual that night. (P26)

think little of 不重视；认为没价值

It is wrong to think little of everything. 对什么都不在乎是不对的。

She thought little of my work. 她不看重我的工作。

【词汇网络】类似词组：

think much of 认为某人很重要

think better of sb. 对某人印象好；看重某人

think better of sth. 改变……念头；打消主意

think highly of 看重；器重

think well of 重视

think little of 看轻；看不起

think poorly of 不放在眼里；轻视

think nothing of 轻视；认为无所谓；认为没什么了不起

as usual 照例；和平常或习惯一样：

As usual, I slept late that Saturday morning.

和平时一样，那个星期六早晨我起得很迟

5.Sand now filled the wells instead of water. (P26)

instead adv

1) 替代；更换

If you cannot go, let him go instead.

如果你不能去，让他替你去。

2) （与of连用）代替

We’ll have tea in the garden instead of in the house.

我们将改在花园喝茶，而不在屋里喝。

6. Describe your feelings about the city, which is known as the “Brave City of China”. (P29)

1) be known as +身份

2) be known for... 因……出名

The area is known as a green tea producing places.

这个地方是以绿茶生产地而闻名的。

The town is known for its fine park.

这个小镇以它精致漂亮的公园而闻名。

3) be known by 根……而得知

A person is known by the company he keeps.

根据他经营的公司可知道他这个人。

4) be known to 被某人所了解

It is known to all that theory comes from practice.

大家都知道理论来自实践。

7. One other thing to remember. (P31)

one other :应该注意限定词顺序,

“限定词”包括：冠词、物主代词、指示代词、或数词，它位于各类形容词前。它本身分为三位，即：前、中、后。前位限定词有all、half、both、分数和倍数；中位限定词有冠词、指示代词、物主代词等；后位限定词有基数词和序数词，但序数词位于基数词前。如:both my hands、all half his income等。

8. An outline will prepare you to write a better story. (P31)

prepare

1) prepare “准备；预备；筹备；制作；配制”

①prepare + 名词或代词。例如：

He has prepared his lessons. 他已备好课了。

②prepare + 双宾语（间接宾语和直接宾语）。例如：

The secretary has prepared the president a long report.

= The secretary has prepared a long report for the president.

秘书已为董事长准备好了一份长篇报告稿。

③prepare + 动词不定式短语。例如：

They are busy preparing to go on vacation.

他们正忙着准备去度假。

④prepare + for （或 against ）引起的短语。例如：

The students are busy preparing for the mid-term examination.

学生们正忙于为期中考试作准备。

The peasants are preparing against the drought.

农民们正在为抗干旱作准备。

2) prepare“使（人）作好准备；叫（人）作准备”：

①prepare + sb/oneself + for sth.例如：

He was preparing himself for the marathon race then.

他当时正在为参加马拉松比赛而作准备。

②prepare + sb/oneself + 动词不定式短语。例如：

He prepared himself to take out a license for a driver.

他为取得汽车驾驶执照作了准备。

3) 过去分词 prepared 用于系表结构，意思为“为……做好准备；打算”：

①be prepared + for （或 against ）引起的短语。例如：

They were prepared for the worst.

他们已准备好应付最坏的情况。

② be prepared + 不定式短语。例如：

I am not prepared to listen to all your weak excuses.

我不愿听你那些不成借口的借口。

其它写出单词意思

earthquake, quake, right away, well (n.) , million , event , pipe, burst, as if, at an end , nation , canal, steam, dirt, ruin, in ruins , suffering, extreme, injure, destroy, brick, dam, track, useless, steel, shock, rescue, trap, electricity, disaster, dig out, bury, mine, miner, shelter, a (great ) number of , title, reporter, bar, damage, frighten, frightened, frightening, congratulation, judge, sincerely, express, outline, headline, cyclist

shake,well,rise,smelly,pond,pipe,burst,canal,steam,ruin,injure,destroy,brick,dam,useless,steel,shock,quake,rescue,electricity,disaster,army,organize,bury,coal,mine,shelter,fresh,percent,speech,judge,honor,prepare,Europe.crack, survivor, miner

right away, at an end, dig out, give out, thousands of

重点句子

1. Farmers’ wives noticed that the well walls had deep cracks in them.

2. It seemed as if the world was at an end!

3. Bricks covered the ground like red autumn leaves.

4. The army organized teams to dig out those who were trapped and to bury the dead.

5. Workers built shelters for survivors whose homes had been destroyed.

shake, rise, crack, burst, well, smelly, pond, steam, destroy, ruin, injure, survivor, brick, useless, shock, quake, rescue, electricity,

disaster, organize, bury, coal, mine, shelter, fresh, percent, honor, prepare.

② 短语：right away, at an end, lie in ruins, be trapped under sth, to the north of sp, put up, give out, wake sb up, prepare sth for sth., think little of sth.

选词填空

dream of , make up one’s mind, change one’s mind,

give in, give up, insist on, stick to, determine to

John is a mountaineering-lover, who has _________conquering the Alps, a mountain with an altitude of 4804 meters since he was a middle school student. However, his mother thought that mountaineering was such a dangerous sport that she always tried to persuade him to _________. It is his deep love for climbing that made him __________ realizing his dream.

One day, John got the chance to climb the Alps. His friends __________ form a team to pay a visit to the Alps and of course John joined them happily. In order to do the trip properly, they examined every detail. Feeling his son’s great determination, John’s mother knew that he would not_____________. Finally, John and his friends succeeded in conquering the Alps.

第5单元

词汇过关

1.重点单词拼写

1) We should pay more attention to the q as well as the quantity.

2) He is always w to help anyone who is in t .

3) Whatever difficulty you meet, I hope you will never lose h .

4) Everything needs to be done according to a certain (原则,原理)

5) People in Iraq are dreaming of living a p life, that is they hope to live in p .

6) The thief was caught and was s in p for 3 years.

7) During the p when I was in my university, I studied l myself and became a l after graduation.

8) The final examination is coming. Our teacher a us to go over

our lessons carefully.

9) If it c to rain for some days, the crops would be destroyed.

10) If he gets that (职位），I think he can do it well.

11) He received a sum of money, but he didn’t want to a it.

12) They don’t want to solve the problem with v . Instead, they hope to solve it in a peaceful way.

13) In some countries, especially in some poor countries, women are not

really e to men.

14) If you feel cold while sleeping, you can add a b on your quilt.

15) As a well-e person, it’s hard for us to imagine that she treat the boy with such (残忍).

2. 重点词词形变换

1) The pupils got to know that Liu Hulan was a and died and they were moved by her deeds. (hero)

2) They were so that they cut the man into pieces . We all felt sure that they would be punished by their . (cruel)

3) He is really a man with many , but do you think you are

enough to do the work? (quality)

4) Let him do what he . He is not to do that if it is against his . (will)

5) pay for work. That’s our rule. If we can’t treat every client , we will break the in our company. (equal)

6) We all enjoy the of the countryside, for we can live with the nature and live a life there. (peace)

7) You are not allowed to commit any , or you will become

a and be sentenced to prison for the act. (crime)

8) The big waves beat the coast . The wind blew with great , which caused a storm. (violence)

9) If this proposal is to you, you must it. In this way the proposal will meet with general . (accept)

10) She is always having the of snakes. She finds it to come across a snake, which will her very much. (terror)

1.短语积累

put...into prison 把……投进监狱

in fact, as a matter of fact事实上

fight against 与……作斗争

come to power 上台执政

break the law 违反法律

without pay 没有报酬

lose heart 灰心；泄气

be active in 积极参加；活跃

be willing to do something 愿意做某事

be out of work 失业

be stopped from doing something 被阻止做某事

answer violence with violence 以暴制暴

be in good health 健康良好お

blow up 发脾气；爆炸

ask for 索-

be in trouble 处于麻烦中

die for 为……而死

advise somebody to do something 建议某人干某事

in reward for 作为……的回报

set up 建立

be sentenced to 被判处……

worry about 为……担心

be free from 免去……之苦

2. 从上面列举的短语中选择适当的，填入下面的空格中

1) Whatever great difficulty we meet, we’ll never .

2) If you can’t finish the work on time, you’ll be .

3) Your parents are you: do make a phone call to them.

4) She has been for a year and is looking forward to being in work again.

5) People expect to pollution and live in a pleasant environment.

6) -- I thought you wouldn’t mind.

--Well, I don’t; but you should have asked me first.

7) Several people were killed and many were hurt when a bomb at the busy street.

8) As soon as he arrived in Paris, he for the wrongs his family had done.

9) As a Jew, Einstein was forced to leave his homeland after Hitler .

10) The government has a working party to look into the problem of drug abuse.

11) He death because of killing someone on purpose.

12) The women workers should the men in pay since they do the same work.

重要句型

1. The last thirty years have seen the greatest number of laws stopping our rights and progress. (P34)

拟人用法：时间、地点 + see/eyewitness + 事件。

1949 eyewitnessed the foundation of the People’s Republic of China.お

即时强化练习：

翻译下列句子：

1) 我们学校是1993年成立的。

2) 在这个村庄曾经发生过一次灾难。

2. Only then did we decide to answer violence with violence. (P34)

Only+状语+部分倒装句

Only in this way can we find the correct answer.お

即时强化练习：

翻译下列句子：

1) 只有当你遭遇过这样的事情后你才会相信。

2) 只有在这样的一个家庭你才有这样的好生活。

目标解读

1. Will you help others with their work if they ask you? (P33)

help sb with sth 帮助某人做某事

Would you please help me with my homework?

help的其它用法：

1）help sb. (to) do sth. 帮助某人做某事。

Can you help me to learn English?-

2）help oneself （ to sth ）自用（食物等）；随便拿

Help yourself to the fish. 请随便吃鱼。

3）help sb. into/ out of 搀扶某人进入 / 走出。

He helped the patient out of the hospital.

他搀扶病人走出了医院。

Can you help the patient into the hospital?

你能搀扶病人进医院吗？

4）help sb. out 帮助某人克服困难，渡过难关、解决问题、完成工作。 When I’m in trouble, he always helps me out with money.

每当我处境困难时，他总是用金钱帮助我渡过难关。

Please help me out with thi

篇13：Module 6 cultural corner 教案教学设计(新课标版英语高一)

Teaching Goals:

1. To arouse Ss’ interest in learning the differences of the dragon in different countries.

2. To make Ss develop the patriotic feeling.

3. To let Ss learn how to write a mystery of China.

4. To help Ss review what we have learnt in this module;

Teaching procedures:

Step 1. Revision

Check the workbook grammar exercises on pages 97~98.

Step 2. Cultural Corner

Purpose: To arouse Ss’ interest in learning the differences of the dragon in different countries.

1. Group work

Show two pictures of Chinese dragon and western dragon. Ask Ss to discuss the differences and tell something about them.

For your reference:

Western dragons were typically bad creatures which had to be killed. But in China they were generous and wise, and associated with the royal family to show power and strength.

2. Individual work

Ask Ss to read the passage and fill in the blanks by using the key words from the passage.

People talk about (1) almost everywhere in the world but have _(2)_ opinions. In _(3)_ culture, dragons are generous and _(4)_.The dragon was closely _(5)_ to the royal family. According to popular belief, _(6)_you were born in the year of the dragon, you are _(7)_, brave and a natural leader.

But in the west, most people think _(8)_of the dragon. It is said that in an old English story a man kills a _(9)_ dragon and the man is called by people a_(10)_.

The reason _(11)_ westerners dislike dragons is that the idea of the dragon came from the_(12)_, an animal which people _(13)_and were afraid of. But the idea of the dragon in China came from alligator, an animal which is a good _(14)_for agriculture, so the Chinese people think dragons can bring good _(15)_ to them.

篇14：高一下英语词汇复习(新课标版高一英语下册教案教学设计)

1. balance vt/vi/n balance one’s diet

Lose/ keep one’s balance out of balance 失去平衡

adj balanced a balanced diet

2. bear -- bore --- borne 忍受 + n/ doing bear pain

Bore 出生 All men are born equal.

3. bend vt bend a bow 弯弓

Bend one’s mind to work 专心工作

Vi bend to sb/ sb’s will 屈服于某人的意志

4. be on good terms with sb 与某人关系好 Be on bad terms with sb .

terms 关系，友谊，地位

They are on familiar terms with each other. 他们彼此很熟悉。

Keep on good terms with sb. 同某人保持友好关系

5. besides adv 此外 I’m too tired to go, besides, it is too late.

Prep 除--- 之外 He didn’t agree with you except some details.

6. bring back 拿回来 bring back to life. 恢复生机

bring about 带来，造成 bring about great changes.

What brought about his illness?

bring down 使倒下，使下降，打倒，击落

bring down the price /an enemy plane

I’m sure that the medicine will bring your fever down.

bring forth 产生 Weed through the old to bring forth the new. 推沉出新

bring forward 提出，提议 Bring forward a new design.

bring in 提出，引进，获利，收获

bring out 使显现，阐明，出版，生产

Bring out the meaning of a passage. 阐明一段文字的意义

bring up 教育，培养，养育，提出（议题等）

7． bother n 麻烦，困难

Vt 打扰，麻烦，使烦恼，使难受

I’m busy, don’t _____ me.

A. borrow B. bother C. brother D. brook

vi. 担心，焦急，费心

Don’t bother about answering this = Don’t bother to answer this.

此信不必回

1.call on sb = drop in on sb = visit sb = pay a visit to sb

Call on sb to do sth 号召某人----

Call at sp = drop in at sp =visit sp

Call for 需要，要求，去接某人，去取某物

Call in 请来，叫来

Call off 取消，停止

Call up = ring up 打电话给--- 使回忆起--- The scene called up my childhood.

Call away 叫走

Call back 叫回去，回电话

Call in 来访。 Call in ,or ring us up. 你可以亲自来，也可以打电话来。

As there was a power cat in the hospital , the surgeon had to _____the operation. A. call for B. call on C. call up D. call off

2． Celebration n 庆祝，庆典。

V． celebrate 通常指对节日，生日，胜利，结婚的纪念

They are ______ their grandmother’s seventieth birthday.

A. greeting B. joining C. congratulating D. celebrating

greet 表示致敬，问候等； join 参加，加入

congratulate 祝贺，对象常指人 congratulate sb on sth 因--祝贺某人。

3。 Central a 中央的，中心的

The prime Minister is the central figure in the government.

首相是政府的中心人物。

n centre/center 中心，中央（多和the 连用）

The city is the commercial ________ of the whole country.

A. middle B. center

center 可用来比喻某一方面占据重要位置常用 at the center of

middle 通常指事物两端之间的位置，常用词组为in the middle of

4. cheerful 愉快的，高兴的

He is ________ in his mind.

A. cheerful B .merry C. glad 他心情愉快。

cheerful 多指人天性乐观，在任何情况下都保持欣然的态度

merry 多指在节日或其他热闹场所表现出来的快乐情绪

Glad 暂时的喜悦

v. cheer 振奋，欢呼，喝彩 cheer up. 高兴起来

5. climate

I would rather live in France because of the _______.

A. weather B. climate

climate 指某地区的长时间的天气特征，特别是气温，降雨，刮风等总的气候情况

weather 指某地区短时间内的特殊气候变化，如晴，雨，雪，暖

6. certain

1) 一种，一个，指单数 a Mr Smith = some Mr Smith

2) 某一些 certain students =/ some students

3) 确定，有把握

Be certain of sth 对―――有把握

Be certain to do sth 一定要干某事

Sb be certain that / it is certain that

7. charge get / be / become charged

Vt. 1). 使充电，充满 charge the battery

be charged with = be filled with The bottle is charged with water.

2). 要价，收费 charge sb money for ---- 因―― 而收某人的钱。

He charged me 10 yuan for the book.

3). 控告某人 charge sb with sth The police charged him with driving after drinking.

4). 攻击。 The enemy charged us 3 times.

n. 1）费用 free of charge 免费 hotel charges 旅馆费

2）管，看管 in charge of ／take charge of 负责

in the charge of 由―― 负责

8. coast on the coast 在海岸 There are many ships resting on the coast.

Off the coast 在海上 There are a number of islands off the coast.

9. comfort

n 1) 安慰，舒适，安逸（不可数） She finds much comfort in her son.

2) 给予安慰的人／物，使人舒适的事（可数）

The hotel has many comforts.

A cup of hot milk is a comfort in the cols winter night.

3) in comfort We live in comfort.

Vt I tried to comfort him, but I could say nothing.

Adj comfortable The seat is comfortable to sit in.

adv comfortably.

10. conclusion 结论make/ reach / arrive at/ come to / draw a conclusion 下结论

11. condition

1) cn 条件，状况 in /under a good /bad condition(S)

2) conditions 情形，境况

3）表示身体的健康状况（不可数）

in condition 身体健康 out of condition 身体不好。

in the state of 处于某种状态

4） on condition that = if 如果，在―――的条件下，条件是――

I will lend the book to you on condition that you don’t lend it to others.

12. continue Vt / vi continue to do sth = doing sth =go on with =go on doing =keep on doing

继续做同一件事， go on to do 继续做另一件事。

13. conflict n / vi 矛盾，冲突，有分歧

In conflict 有矛盾，不一致 in conflict with sb 和――有矛盾／分歧

14．contact n 接触，联系

be in contact with 和―― 接触，有联系be out of contact with sb 脱离接触，失去联系

have contact with sb 和―― 有联系 lose contact with 和――失去联系

15. crazy a

1) be crazy for sth He is crazy for football.

2) be crazy about doing sth 疯狂干―― He is crazy about drinking .

16. cut off 切掉，切断，突然中止

Cut down 砍倒（树）削减 cut down on price /smoking

Cut in 插嘴，突然插入

Cut into 把―― 切成―― ，侵犯利益

1. date back(to )回溯至----

注意： date back to / date from 没有被动语态。多用于一般现在式。

date n 约会 Mary has a date with her secretary.

2. debt n债务 in debt 欠债 out of debt 不欠债

In debt to sb= in sb’s debt 欠某人的债 pay off the debt 还清债务

3．depend on 依靠，信赖，取决于

1） depend on sb /sth 相信／依靠某人 The price depends on the quality.

depend on sb to do sth 相信某人做某事 We can depend on itto solve the problem.

2）It all depends = That depends on it 看情况而定，不一定

3）depend on / insist on / ask for / see to it that----

We depend on it that he will come.

4. die down 变弱，平息，消失（强调结果）

die away （声音，光）渐渐消失，风渐渐平息（强调过程）

die out 灭绝，消失

5. direction n 方向，指导

a poor sense of direction 方向感差

in ---- direction = in the direction of --- 朝着―――的方向

in all directions = in every direction 朝四面八方

under the direction of 在―― 的指导下。

follow the direction 听从指导

6．Divide 分，划分，分开

divide between/among /with sb 在--- 之间分

divide sth into 把---分成 divide the apple into halves/ in two/in half

divide 把整体分为几部分

separate 把连在一起的或相邻的分割开

The world is divided into 7 continents.

The Tai wan strait separates Taiwan from Fu jian provience.

7. doubt 怀疑，疑惑 adj doubtful 不相信的，可疑的

n no doubt 无疑地，很可能 beyond a doubt 毫无疑问

Vt 怀疑，不信 I don’t doubt that he’ll come.

Vi 怀疑 + of/about He doubt about everything / He doubt of her success.

Doubt 后宾语从句中关联词的使用

1）肯定句时，名词从句用whether/if , when ,what 等连接

I doubt whether he’ll come.

2) 疑问句否定句时，名词从句用that 连接。

Does any one doubt that it is so? 它原如此，有人怀疑吗？

I don’t doubt that he will come.

Are you _______of success?

A. dreadful B. doubtful C. historical D. miserable

8. dress up 盛装，打扮，装饰

1）Dress vt dress sb /oneself 给--- 穿衣服

2）Be dressed in + 衣服，颜色 Dressed in red, he is difficult to recognize.

3) dress up in 穿---来打扮 People here like dressing up in ancient clothes..

4） dress up as 打扮成---的样子 The old man dressed up as Santa clause.

5) dress up for He is dressing up for his birthday party.

1. educate vt /vi 教育，培养，训练

1).educate sb in sth 教育某人在---方面

Parents should educate children in how to spent money.

2).educate sb to do 教育某人做某事

The teacher educates his students to behave well in class.

3) educate oneself 自学

4）adj educated 受教育的，有教养的

2．endless adj 无穷的，无限的

She is a woman with _____ patience.

A. ending B. endless C. enormous D. large

ending 结局，结尾 enormous 巨大的，庞大的，多指超过限度

large 大的，侧重面积，范围，容量

2. energy 能量，精力 (不可数) He has much energy.

1）adj energetic 精力旺盛的，有精力的

2） full of energy 精力充沛 burn up energy 燃烧能量

How much energy do you think you will burp up in the relay race?

Heat is a form of _______. A power B. force C. energy

Power 指电力，功率，权力等

Force 指自然力和人力，也指暴力等影响力

3．Exist vi 存在，生存

There exists a kind of power that can make you win.

N existence

People do not now believe in the _____ of ghosts.

A. birth B . evidence C .existence D. occurrence

4. explain n explanation 解释说明

Explain to sb sth (suggest / express/ announce/ say/metion)

Explain oneself = give reasons

Is there any _____ for his conduct?

A. expression B. explanation C. experiment

1. faith 信仰，信赖，诺言，信念

have faith in sb/sth 信任某人，某物

have faith that ----

lose one’s faith 失去信心

adj faithful 忠诚的 be faithful to sb 对某人忠诚

2. fame 名声，名望 rise to fame=come to fame 成功，成名

be famous / well-known for nice scenery/ as a writer / to all of us

As is known to us ,------- = It is known that ----

3. fever 发烧

have /catch a fever/ cold / stomachache/ headache/toothache

4. fasten 栓紧，抓紧，使固定

1） fasten---- to --- Fasten the horse to the tree.

2) fasten one’s eyes on 盯着某人看

5. firm adj 动作稳定而有力的，牢固的

Stand firm 坚定立场，坚定不屈

We firmly believe in your leading.

5. fit vt fit sb vi fit to do sth 适合做某事

adj keep /stay fit 保持健康

be fit for sth/sb

6． Focus n （兴趣，活动等）中心，焦点

She always wants to be the focus of attention.

In focus 焦点对准 out of focus 焦点没对准

Focus one’s attention on sth = fix one’s eyes on sth

All eyes were fixed/focused on him.

7． Fortunately adv 反义 unfortunately

Fortunate adj 幸运的，多指由于某种有利的境遇，使人得到未曾预料到的成功或好的机遇。

Lucky更加强调意外或偶然原因而得到成功

He made a ____ decision when he went into adertising.

n fortune 运气，命运，钱财，财产

Fortune knocks once at everyone’s door. 机会人人有，来了莫放手

Make a fortune 发财

1． gain vt 获得，增加gain/get/win the first prize

gain /earn/make one’s living

n 收获，增加 No pains, o gains.不劳无获

A fall into the pit,a gain in your wit. 吃一堑长一智

2． Generation 代

From generation to generation /from generation to another

3. gift 礼物，赠品；天赋，才能。

The album of paintings in this museum is a __from an old professor.

A. gift B.present C.talent

该博物馆的画集是一位老教授捐赠的。

Present与gift都可以做“礼物”讲，可互换，但gift有“捐赠”。

Gobang:五子棋 Go to ! 去你的的意思。 Gift做“天赋”讲时，与talent意思相近。

4．graduate {vt. 毕业。主语一般为学校。

{vi. 毕业 graduate from

{n. 大学毕业生

The university graduated 400 students this summer.

今年夏天，这所大学有400人毕业。

5．guide n. 导游，向导，指南，指导

Vt. 引导，指导。带领。

It was the government that guided the country through the difficulties ahead.

政府引导全国人民克服当前的困难。

guidance n. 指导。

under the guidance of 在…

6. get through

1).通过（检查，测试，海关，议案，方案，计划）

She got through the examination.

The message got through to us at last.这消息终于送到了我们这儿

Get through with one’s work 完成某人的工作

2）完成

How long did it take you to get through the letter?

We should get through the work ahead of the deadline.

3)get through on the phone. 接通电话

4）度过时间，花钱

We got through a fortune while we were on holiday.我们度假花了一大笔钱。

Go through 仔细检查，全面考虑，研究；经历

Go through the items one by one. 逐条研究

Go through two stages. 经历两个阶段。

1. handkerchief (pl) ---handkerchieves-handkerchiefs

2. heat

1） n 热，热量，热烈，压力a heat of five hundred degrees

2） vt heat --- to 把---加热到-- Heat the water to 100, it will boil.

3） n heating 供暖设备

4） adj. heated 热烈的 a heated discussion.

3. hold up 举起，拿起，举出

1）hold back 阻止 No one can hold back the wheel of history.

Hold sb back from doing sth 阻止某人做某事

2）hold down 压制，镇压。

3）hold in 约束，抑制。 Hold oneself in 抑制自己的感情

4）hold on 电话不挂上

The speaker hold on for a full hour. 演讲得人讲了整整一小时

5）hold on to 抓住---不放；坚持

In spite of various difficulities, he held on to the dream of returning to his homeland. 尽管困难重重，他始终没有放弃回到家乡的梦想

6）hold off 不接近，拖延

We hope the rain will hold off till evening.

我们希望这场雨能拖到明天晚上下。

7）hold out 伸出，坚持，不屈服

Hold out till victory. 坚持到胜利

4． honour

1) 荣誉，尊敬，名誉（不可数）

2）带来荣誉的人或事；荣幸

He is an honor of this school.

It is an honor for me to be invited to the party.

3) in honor of 纪念某人/向某人表示敬意

do sb honor= do honor to sb. 向某人表示敬意

4）。 Vt honor sb 向某人致敬

In order to honor him, I gave him some flowers.

5) sb be honored to do sth 很荣幸的做某事

I am honored to introduce Mr Smith.

1. imagination n . 想象， beyond the imagination超乎想象

想象力 have a strong/poor imagination

V imagine + n/pron/doing / 名词性从句

I can’t imagine going there without anybody else.

Adj imaginary 虚构的 imaginative 富有想象力的

2.Injury n 伤害，受伤处

receive/suffer an injury 受伤

do an injury to sb= do harm to 伤害某人

adj injured the injured

4. in order 按顺序，整齐（反义） out of order

order vt 1） order sb to do sth 要求某人做某事

2).ordered that ----(should ) do

He ordered that he should return next day. （虚拟）

His orders were to return next day., （虚拟）

3） order sth to be done 要求---被做

n 1). Place an order with sb for sth 和某人订购---

2）order from 从----订购

3） obey/break the order 服从/违背

5. inspire vt 鼓励，鼓舞，激发，启示

inspire sb sth 鼓励某人

inspire sb to do sth 鼓励某人做某事

His life of childhood inspired this novel.

What he said inspired me to cry.

adj inspiring 令人鼓舞的

Inspired 深受鼓舞的

His inspiring speech made us inspired.

6. intend vt 打算，将要

1). Intend sb to do sth Will you intend to stay long in London?

2) Intend to have done sth=had intended to do 本打算做而没做

I intended to have called on you, But I had an unexpected visitor.

3). Intend that + should do 倾向于---

We intended that the plan should carry out at once.

4). Sth be intended for 为---准备，专供---

These flowers were intended for your mother’s day.

1.keep up with 追赶，追上。

catch up with 赶上并超过

keep up 保持，使-不低落 keep up with the spirits.

come up with 提出

1． Lean 倚靠，倾斜

lean to/ towards 倾向于某种观点

He leaned to the view that we started of at once.

lean over 俯身在---上

lean on the table 靠着桌子

lean against the wall. 倚墙

2． Location 地方，位置

locate vt 使---坐落于-位于---

Their new house ___ by the river.他们的新房坐落于河边

A.lies in B. location C. is located D .is lied

be located = lie

3．lovely 好看的，可爱的，令人愉快的（口语）

a lovely child / a lovely landscape 明媚的景色

have a lovely afternoon. 过一个愉快的下午

live 活的，有生命的（与dead 相对）特指动物。

lively 活泼的，活跃的，栩栩如生的，生动的

The article gave a lively description on South American life.

文章对南美的生活做了生动的描述。

living 活着的

alive 活着的，现场直播的

4． Light vt light a candle

Vi The wood is hard to light.

Adj lighted a lighted candle.

light up 照亮，容光焕发，放光

1. major

1). 主要的，大部分

The major part/ aspect/ person

2). Vi 主修 major in English.

3）专业 I am an English major./ My major is English.

N majority the majority of ---

Compared with the majority, you are lucky.

2. mainly = mostly 主要的，大部分的

Many Europeans are mainly English settlers here.

3. make a good choice

make a fire / make friends with sb/ make noise / make war/ make sure /

make a face /make a face at sb / make fun of

4. make up

1）组成 5 girls and 6 boys made up the football team.

2）编造He made up a frightening story to frighten us.

3） = dress up 打扮，装扮，化装

4） Make up for 弥补 We should make up for the waste time.

5. make use of 利用

They don’t realize the use we made of the information.

他们没有意识到我们对信息的利用

They don’t realize the information we made use of.

6. mild 指生来情绪温和

gentle 指态度使人感到和蔼可亲，意思较mild 强

He could not say no to so many requests because he is a mild person.

对于众多的要求他不能说“不”，因为他是个温和的人

7． Manage 设法，经营，对付

1）. manage =run=operate They managed money well.

2) manage to do =succeed in doing 成功地做了某事

He tried to persuade me to give in, but he didn’t manage to .

3) 与can ,be able to ,could 连用，设法对付，设法办成

In spite of there is much trouble, they could manage to finish the work on time.

4) n manager 经理，经营者 management 管理，经营

8． Method with this method / in this way/ by this means

9. minority 少数的 the minority of

be in the/a minority 少数派

1. occur

1). Happen ,take place, come about ,occur

It occurred to me .

2). 出现，呈现= appear

The plants occurred only in Africa.

3). 浮现 A good idea occurred to me.

4). It happened /occurred to sb that 某人突然想起，突然发现---

It occurred to me that we could ask our neighbors to help us

2. operate

1).vt. 管理，经营操作

They operated a small company in the south of England.

It is easy to operate the machine.

2). Vi 运转，起作用

The medicine operates quickly.

3). Operate on/upon 动手术

The doctor operated on the injured man.

The injured man was operated on by the doctor.

3. opinion (不可数)

1). in one’s opinion = in one’s view

2). have a good/bad /worse opinion of sb.

1. pace 一步，速度，步调 He stands five paces behind me.

At the pace of three miles an hour 以每小时三英里的速度

At a slow/fast speed 走得快/慢

I f we want to keep up with the high pace of modern life ,we had better learn to make the right choices about what and how we eat.

2. part vi/vt 使分开/分离

Vi part from sb 与某人分开/分离/分手

N 部分；角色，作用；零件

We are parts of society.

Women are playing an important part in socialist construction.妇女在社会主义建设中起着非常重要的作用。

Part with 放弃，出让 I suggested him to part with the house.

3． pay off 还清债务

pay for 为某物/某人付钱；付钱买---；为-付出代价

pay back 偿还，回报

pay up 全部付清，按时还清

One day, you will _____ this foolish behavior.

A. pay B. pay for C. pay back D. pay off

4． Pick up 拾起，捡起；开车接某人

Pick out 挑出，辨别出

Pick on sb 挑剔某人

Pick off 摘下

At 7:30, I’ll drive over to ____ you ___ . Please get ready at that time.

A. pick, on B. pick; out C. pick ; up D. pick; off

The signal for help was ______ by another ship which happened to be at hand.

1. balance vt/vi/n balance one’s diet

Lose/ keep one’s balance out of balance 失去平衡

adj balanced a balanced diet

2. bear -- bore --- borne 忍受 + n/ doing bear pain

Bore 出生 All men are born equal.

3. bend vt bend a bow 弯弓

Bend one’s mind to work 专心工作

Vi bend to sb/ sb’s will 屈服于某人的意志

4. be on good terms with sb 与某人关系好 Be on bad terms with sb .

terms 关系，友谊，地位

They are on familiar terms with each other. 他们彼此很熟悉。

Keep on good terms with sb. 同某人保持友好关系

5. besides adv 此外 I’m too tired to go, besides, it is too late.

Prep 除--- 之外 He didn’t agree with you except some details.

6. bring back 拿回来 bring back to life. 恢复生机

bring about 带来，造成 bring about great changes.

What brought about his illness?

bring down 使倒下，使下降，打倒，击落

bring down the price /an enemy plane

I’m sure that the medicine will bring your fever down.

bring forth 产生 Weed through the old to bring forth the new. 推沉出新

bring forward 提出，提议 Bring forward a new design.

bring in 提出，引进，获利，收获

bring out 使显现，阐明，出版，生产

Bring out the meaning of a passage. 阐明一段文字的意义

bring up 教育，培养，养育，提出（议题等）

7． bother n 麻烦，困难

Vt 打扰，麻烦，使烦恼，使难受

I’m busy, don’t _____ me.

A. borrow B. bother C. brother D. brook

vi. 担心，焦急，费心

Don’t bother about answering this = Don’t bother to answer this.

此信不必回

1.call on sb = drop in on sb = visit sb = pay a visit to sb

Call on sb to do sth 号召某人----

Call at sp = drop in at sp =visit sp

Call for 需要，要求，去接某人，去取某物

Call in 请来，叫来

Call off 取消，停止

Call up = ring up 打电话给--- 使回忆起--- The scene called up my childhood.

Call away 叫走

Call back 叫回去，回电话

Call in 来访。 Call in ,or ring us up. 你可以亲自来，也可以打电话来。

As there was a power cat in the hospital , the surgeon had to _____the operation. A. call for B. call on C. call up D. call off

2． Celebration n 庆祝，庆典。

V． celebrate 通常指对节日，生日，胜利，结婚的纪念

They are ______ their grandmother’s seventieth birthday.

A. greeting B. joining C. congratulating D. celebrating

greet 表示致敬，问候等； join 参加，加入

congratulate 祝贺，对象常指人 congratulate sb on sth 因--祝贺某人。

3。 Central a 中央的，中心的

The prime Minister is the central figure in the government.

首相是政府的中心人物。

n centre/center 中心，中央（多和the 连用）

The city is the commercial ________ of the whole country.

A. middle B. center

center 可用来比喻某一方面占据重要位置常用 at the center of

middle 通常指事物两端之间的位置，常用词组为in the middle of

4. cheerful 愉快的，高兴的

He is ________ in his mind.

A. cheerful B .merry C. glad 他心情愉快。

cheerful 多指人天性乐观，在任何情况下都保持欣然的态度

merry 多指在节日或其他热闹场所表现出来的快乐情绪

Glad 暂时的喜悦

v. cheer 振奋，欢呼，喝彩 cheer up. 高兴起来

5. climate

I would rather live in France because of the _______.

A. weather B. climate

climate 指某地区的长时间的天气特征，特别是气温，降雨，刮风等总的气候情况

weather 指某地区短时间内的特殊气候变化，如晴，雨，雪，暖

6. certain

1) 一种，一个，指单数 a Mr Smith = some Mr Smith

2) 某一些 certain students =/ some students

3) 确定，有把握

Be certain of sth 对―――有把握

Be certain to do sth 一定要干某事

Sb be certain that / it is certain that

7. charge get / be / become charged

Vt. 1). 使充电，充满 charge the battery

be charged with = be filled with The bottle is charged with water.

2). 要价，收费 charge sb money for ---- 因―― 而收某人的钱。

He charged me 10 yuan for the book.

3). 控告某人 charge sb with sth The police charged him with driving after drinking.

4). 攻击。 The enemy charged us 3 times.

n. 1）费用 free of charge 免费 hotel charges 旅馆费

2）管，看管 in charge of ／take charge of 负责

in the charge of 由―― 负责

8. coast on the coast 在海岸 There are many ships resting on the coast.

Off the coast 在海上 There are a number of islands off the coast.

9. comfort

n 1) 安慰，舒适，安逸（不可数） She finds much comfort in her son.

2) 给予安慰的人／物，使人舒适的事（可数）

The hotel has many comforts.

A cup of hot milk is a comfort in the cols winter night.

3) in comfort We live in comfort.

Vt I tried to comfort him, but I could say nothing.

Adj comfortable The seat is comfortable to sit in.

adv comfortably.

10. conclusion 结论make/ reach / arrive at/ come to / draw a conclusion 下结论

11. condition

1) cn 条件，状况 in /under a good /bad condition(S)

2) conditions 情形，境况

3）表示身体的健康状况（不可数）

in condition 身体健康 out of condition 身体不好。

in the state of 处于某种状态

4） on condition that = if 如果，在―――的条件下，条件是――

I will lend the book to you on condition that you don’t lend it to others.

12. continue Vt / vi continue to do sth = doing sth =go on with =go on doing =keep on doing

继续做同一件事， go on to do 继续做另一件事。

13. conflict n / vi 矛盾，冲突，有分歧

In conflict 有矛盾，不一致 in conflict with sb 和――有矛盾／分歧

14．contact n 接触，联系

be in contact with 和―― 接触，有联系be out of contact with sb 脱离接触，失去联系

have contact with sb 和―― 有联系 lose contact with 和――失去联系

15. crazy a

1) be crazy for sth He is crazy for football.

2) be crazy about doing sth 疯狂干―― He is crazy about drinking .

16. cut off 切掉，切断，突然中止

Cut down 砍倒（树）削减 cut down on price /smoking

Cut in 插嘴，突然插入

Cut into 把―― 切成―― ，侵犯利益

1. date back(to )回溯至----

注意： date back to / date from 没有被动语态。多用于一般现在式。

date n 约会 Mary has a date with her secretary.

2. debt n债务 in debt 欠债 out of debt 不欠债

In debt to sb= in sb’s debt 欠某人的债 pay off the debt 还清债务

3．depend on 依靠，信赖，取决于

1） depend on sb /sth 相信／依靠某人 The price depends on the quality.

depend on sb to do sth 相信某人做某事 We can depend on itto solve the problem.

2）It all depends = That depends on it 看情况而定，不一定

3）depend on / insist on / ask for / see to it that----

We depend on it that he will come.

4. die down 变弱，平息，消失（强调结果）

die away （声音，光）渐渐消失，风渐渐平息（强调过程）

die out 灭绝，消失

5. direction n 方向，指导

a poor sense of direction 方向感差

in ---- direction = in the direction of --- 朝着―――的方向

in all directions = in every direction 朝四面八方

under the direction of 在―― 的指导下。

follow the direction 听从指导

6．Divide 分，划分，分开

divide between/among /with sb 在--- 之间分

divide sth into 把---分成 divide the apple into halves/ in two/in half

divide 把整体分为几部分

separate 把连在一起的或相邻的分割开

The world is divided into 7 continents.

The Tai wan strait separates Taiwan from Fu jian provience.

7. doubt 怀疑，疑惑 adj doubtful 不相信的，可疑的

n no doubt 无疑地，很可能 beyond a doubt 毫无疑问

Vt 怀疑，不信 I don’t doubt that he’ll come.

Vi 怀疑 + of/about He doubt about everything / He doubt of her success.

Doubt 后宾语从句中关联词的使用

1）肯定句时，名词从句用whether/if , when ,what 等连接

I doubt whether he’ll come.

2) 疑问句否定句时，名词从句用that 连接。

Does any one doubt that it is so? 它原如此，有人怀疑吗？

I don’t doubt that he will come.

Are you _______of success?

A. dreadful B. doubtful C. historical D. miserable

8. dress up 盛装，打扮，装饰

1）Dress vt dress sb /oneself 给--- 穿衣服

2）Be dressed in + 衣服，颜色 Dressed in red, he is difficult to recognize.

3) dress up in 穿---来打扮 People here like dressing up in ancient clothes..

4） dress up as 打扮成---的样子 The old man dressed up as Santa clause.

5) dress up for He is dressing up for his birthday party.

1. educate vt /vi 教育，培养，训练

1).educate sb in sth 教育某人在---方面

Parents should educate children in how to spent money.

2).educate sb to do 教育某人做某事

The teacher educates his students to behave well in class.

3) educate oneself 自学

4）adj educated 受教育的，有教养的

2．endless adj 无穷的，无限的

She is a woman with _____ patience.

A. ending B. endless C. enormous D. large

ending 结局，结尾 enormous 巨大的，庞大的，多指超过限度

large 大的，侧重面积，范围，容量

2. energy 能量，精力 (不可数) He has much energy.

1）adj energetic 精力旺盛的，有精力的

2） full of energy 精力充沛 burn up energy 燃烧能量

How much energy do you think you will burp up in the relay race?

Heat is a form of _______. A power B. force C. energy

Power 指电力，功率，权力等

Force 指自然力和人力，也指暴力等影响力

3．Exist vi 存在，生存

There exists a kind of power that can make you win.

N existence

People do not now believe in the _____ of ghosts.

A. birth B . evidence C .existence D. occurrence

4. explain n explanation 解释说明

Explain to sb sth (suggest / express/ announce/ say/metion)

Explain oneself = give reasons

Is there any _____ for his conduct?

A. expression B. explanation C. experiment

1. faith 信仰，信赖，诺言，信念

have faith in sb/sth 信任某人，某物

have faith that ----

lose one’s faith 失去信心

adj faithful 忠诚的 be faithful to sb 对某人忠诚

2. fame 名声，名望 rise to fame=come to fame 成功，成名

be famous / well-known for nice scenery/ as a writer / to all of us

As is known to us ,------- = It is known that ----

3. fever 发烧

have /catch a fever/ cold / stomachache/ headache/toothache

4. fasten 栓紧，抓紧，使固定

1） fasten---- to --- Fasten the horse to the tree.

2) fasten one’s eyes on 盯着某人看

5. firm adj 动作稳定而有力的，牢固的

Stand firm 坚定立场，坚定不屈

We firmly believe in your leading.

5. fit vt fit sb vi fit to do sth 适合做某事

adj keep /stay fit 保持健康

be fit for sth/sb

6． Focus n （兴趣，活动等）中心，焦点

She always wants to be the focus of attention.

In focus 焦点对准 out of focus 焦点没对准

Focus one’s attention on sth = fix one’s eyes on sth

All eyes were fixed/focused on him.

7． Fortunately adv 反义 unfortunately

Fortunate adj 幸运的，多指由于某种有利的境遇，使人得到未曾预料到的成功或好的机遇。

Lucky更加强调意外或偶然原因而得到成功

He made a ____ decision when he went into adertising.

n fortune 运气，命运，钱财，财产

Fortune knocks once at everyone’s door. 机会人人有，来了莫放手

Make a fortune 发财

1． gain vt 获得，增加gain/get/win the first prize

gain /earn/make one’s living

n 收获，增加 No pains, o gains.不劳无获

A fall into the pit,a gain in your wit. 吃一堑长一智

2． Generation 代

From generation to generation /from generation to another

3. gift 礼物，赠品；天赋，才能。

The album of paintings in this museum is a __from an old professor.

A. gift B.present C.talent

该博物馆的画集是一位老教授捐赠的。

Present与gift都可以做“礼物”讲，可互换，但gift有“捐赠”。

Gobang:五子棋 Go to ! 去你的的意思。 Gift做“天赋”讲时，与talent意思相近。

4．graduate {vt. 毕业。主语一般为学校。

{vi. 毕业 graduate from

{n. 大学毕业生

The university graduated 400 students this summer.

今年夏天，这所大学有400人毕业。

5．guide n. 导游，向导，指南，指导

Vt. 引导，指导。带领。

It was the government that guided the country through the difficulties ahead.

政府引导全国人民克服当前的困难。

guidance n. 指导。

under the guidance of 在…

6. get through

1).通过（检查，测试，海关，议案，方案，计划）

She got through the examination.

The message got through to us at last.这消息终于送到了我们这儿

Get through with one’s work 完成某人的工作

2）完成

How long did it take you to get through the letter?

We should get through the work ahead of the deadline.

3)get through on the phone. 接通电话

4）度过时间，花钱

We got through a fortune while we were on holiday.我们度假花了一大笔钱。

Go through 仔细检查，全面考虑，研究；经历

Go through the items one by one. 逐条研究

Go through two stages. 经历两个阶段。

1. handkerchief (pl) ---handkerchieves-handkerchiefs

2. heat

1） n 热，热量，热烈，压力a heat of five hundred degrees

2） vt heat --- to 把---加热到-- Heat the water to 100, it will boil.

3） n heating 供暖设备

4） adj. heated 热烈的 a heated discussion.

3. hold up 举起，拿起，举出

1）hold back 阻止 No one can hold back the wheel of history.

Hold sb back from doing sth 阻止某人做某事

2）hold down 压制，镇压。

3）hold in 约束，抑制。 Hold oneself in 抑制自己的感情

4）hold on 电话不挂上

The speaker hold on for a full hour. 演讲得人讲了整整一小时

5）hold on to 抓住---不放；坚持

In spite of various difficulities, he held on to the dream of returning to his homeland. 尽管困难重重，他始终没有放弃回到家乡的梦想

6）hold off 不接近，拖延

We hope the rain will hold off till evening.

我们希望这场雨能拖到明天晚上下。

7）hold out 伸出，坚持，不屈服

Hold out till victory. 坚持到胜利

4． honour

1) 荣誉，尊敬，名誉（不可数）

2）带来荣誉的人或事；荣幸

He is an honor of this school.

It is an honor for me to be invited to the party.

3) in honor of 纪念某人/向某人表示敬意

do sb honor= do honor to sb. 向某人表示敬意

4）。 Vt honor sb 向某人致敬

In order to honor him, I gave him some flowers.

5) sb be honored to do sth 很荣幸的做某事

I am honored to introduce Mr Smith.

1. imagination n . 想象， beyond the imagination超乎想象

想象力 have a strong/poor imagination

V imagine + n/pron/doing / 名词性从句

I can’t imagine going there without anybody else.

Adj imaginary 虚构的 imaginative 富有想象力的

2.Injury n 伤害，受伤处

receive/suffer an injury 受伤

do an injury to sb= do harm to 伤害某人

adj injured the injured

4. in order 按顺序，整齐（反义） out of order

order vt 1） order sb to do sth 要求某人做某事

2).ordered that ----(should ) do

He ordered that he should return next day. （虚拟）

His orders were to return next day., （虚拟）

3） order sth to be done 要求---被做

n 1). Place an order with sb for sth 和某人订购---

2）order from 从----订购

3） obey/break the order 服从/违背

5. inspire vt 鼓励，鼓舞，激发，启示

inspire sb sth 鼓励某人

inspire sb to do sth 鼓励某人做某事

His life of childhood inspired this novel.

What he said inspired me to cry.

adj inspiring 令人鼓舞的

Inspired 深受鼓舞的

His inspiring speech made us inspired.

6. intend vt 打算，将要

1). Intend sb to do sth Will you intend to stay long in London?

2) Intend to have done sth=had intended to do 本打算做而没做

I intended to have called on you, But I had an unexpected visitor.

3). Intend that + should do 倾向于---

We intended that the plan should carry out at once.

4). Sth be intended for 为---准备，专供---

These flowers were intended for your mother’s day.

1.keep up with 追赶，追上。

catch up with 赶上并超过

keep up 保持，使-不低落 keep up with the spirits.

come up with 提出

1． Lean 倚靠，倾斜

lean to/ towards 倾向于某种观点

He leaned to the view that we started of at once.

lean over 俯身在---上

lean on the table 靠着桌子

lean against the wall. 倚墙

2． Location 地方，位置

locate vt 使---坐落于-位于---

Their new house ___ by the river.他们的新房坐落于河边

A.lies in B. location C. is located D .is lied

be located = lie

3．lovely 好看的，可爱的，令人愉快的（口语）

a lovely child / a lovely landscape 明媚的景色

have a lovely afternoon. 过一个愉快的下午

live 活的，有生命的（与dead 相对）特指动物。

lively 活泼的，活跃的，栩栩如生的，生动的

The article gave a lively description on South American life.

文章对南美的生活做了生动的描述。

living 活着的

alive 活着的，现场直播的

4． Light vt light a candle

Vi The wood is hard to light.

Adj lighted a lighted candle.

light up 照亮，容光焕发，放光

1. major

1). 主要的，大部分

The major part/ aspect/ person

2). Vi 主修 major in English.

3）专业 I am an English major./ My major is English.

N majority the majority of ---

Compared with the majority, you are lucky.

2. mainly = mostly 主要的，大部分的

Many Europeans are mainly English settlers here.

3. make a good choice

make a fire / make friends with sb/ make noise / make war/ make sure /

make a face /make a face at sb / make fun of

4. make up

1）组成 5 girls and 6 boys made up the football team.

2）编造He made up a frightening story to frighten us.

3） = dress up 打扮，装扮，化装

4） Make up for 弥补 We should make up for the waste time.

5. make use of 利用

They don’t realize the use we made of the information.

他们没有意识到我们对信息的利用

They don’t realize the information we made use of.

6. mild 指生来情绪温和

gentle 指态度使人感到和蔼可亲，意思较mild 强

He could not say no to so many requests because he is a mild person.

对于众多的要求他不能说“不”，因为他是个温和的人

7． Manage 设法，经营，对付

1）. manage =run=operate They managed money well.

2) manage to do =succeed in doing 成功地做了某事

He tried to persuade me to give in, but he didn’t manage to .

3) 与can ,be able to ,could 连用，设法对付，设法办成

In spite of there is much trouble, they could manage to finish the work on time.

4) n manager 经理，经营者 management 管理，经营

8． Method with this method / in this way/ by this means

9. minority 少数的 the minority of

be in the/a minority 少数派

1. occur

1). Happen ,take place, come about ,occur

It occurred to me .

2). 出现，呈现= appear

The plants occurred only in Africa.

3). 浮现 A good idea occurred to me.

4). It happened /occurred to sb that 某人突然想起，突然发现---

It occurred to me that we could ask our neighbors to help us

2. operate

1).vt. 管理，经营操作

They operated a small company in the south of England.

It is easy to operate the machine.

2). Vi 运转，起作用

The medicine operates quickly.

3). Operate on/upon 动手术

The doctor operated on the injured man.

The injured man was operated on by the doctor.

3. opinion (不可数)

1). in one’s opinion = in one’s view

2). have a good/bad /worse opinion of sb.

1. pace 一步，速度，步调 He stands five paces behind me.

At the pace of three miles an hour 以每小时三英里的速度

At a slow/fast speed 走得快/慢

I f we want to keep up with the high pace of modern life ,we had better learn to make the right choices about what and how we eat.

2. part vi/vt 使分开/分离

Vi part from sb 与某人分开/分离/分手

N 部分；角色，作用；零件

We are parts of society.

Women are playing an important part in socialist construction.妇女在社会主义建设中起着非常重要的作用。

Part with 放弃，出让 I suggested him to part with the house.

3． pay off 还清债务

pay for 为某物/某人付钱；付钱买---；为-付出代价

pay back 偿还，回报

pay up 全部付清，按时还清

One day, you will _____ this foolish behavior.

A. pay B. pay for C. pay back D. pay off

4． Pick up 拾起，捡起；开车接某人

Pick out 挑出，辨别出

Pick on sb 挑剔某人

Pick off 摘下

At 7:30, I’ll drive over to ____ you ___ . Please get ready at that time.

A. pick, on B. pick; out C. pick ; up D. pick; off

The signal for help was ______ by another ship which happened to be at hand.

1. balance vt/vi/n balance one’s diet

Lose/ keep one’s balance out of balance 失去平衡

adj balanced a balanced diet

2. bear -- bore --- borne 忍受 + n/ doing bear pain

Bore 出生 All men are born equal.

3. bend vt bend a bow 弯弓

Bend one’s mind to work 专心工作

Vi bend to sb/ sb’s will 屈服于某人的意志

4. be on good terms with sb 与某人关系好 Be on bad terms with sb .

terms 关系，友谊，地位

They are on familiar terms with each other. 他们彼此很熟悉。

Keep on good terms with sb. 同某人保持友好关系

5. besides adv 此外 I’m too tired to go, besides, it is too late.

Prep 除--- 之外 He didn’t agree with you except some details.

6. bring back 拿回来 bring back to life. 恢复生机

bring about 带来，造成 bring about great changes.

What brought about his illness?

bring down 使倒下，使下降，打倒，击落

bring down the price /an enemy plane

I’m sure that the medicine will bring your fever down.

bring forth 产生 Weed through the old to bring forth the new. 推沉出新

bring forward 提出，提议 Bring forward a new design.

bring in 提出，引进，获利，收获

bring out 使显现，阐明，出版，生产

Bring out the meaning of a passage. 阐明一段文字的意义

bring up 教育，培养，养育，提出（议题等）

7． bother n 麻烦，困难

Vt 打扰，麻烦，使烦恼，使难受

I’m busy, don’t _____ me.

A. borrow B. bother C. brother D. brook

vi. 担心，焦急，费心

Don’t bother about answering this = Don’t bother to answer this.

此信不必回

1.call on sb = drop in on sb = visit sb = pay a visit to sb

Call on sb to do sth 号召某人----

Call at sp = drop in at sp =visit sp

Call for 需要，要求，去接某人，去取某物

Call in 请来，叫来

Call off 取消，停止

Call up = ring up 打电话给--- 使回忆起--- The scene called up my childhood.

Call away 叫走

Call back 叫回去，回电话

Call in 来访。 Call in ,or ring us up. 你可以亲自来，也可以打电话来。

As there was a power cat in the hospital , the surgeon had to _____the operation. A. call for B. call on C. call up D. call off

2． Celebration n 庆祝，庆典。

V． celebrate 通常指对节日，生日，胜利，结婚的纪念

They are ______ their grandmother’s seventieth birthday.

A. greeting B. joining C. congratulating D. celebrating

greet 表示致敬，问候等； join 参加，加入

congratulate 祝贺，对象常指人 congratulate sb on sth 因--祝贺某人。

3。 Central a 中央的，中心的

The prime Minister is the central figure in the government.

首相是政府的中心人物。

n centre/center 中心，中央（多和the 连用）

The city is the commercial ________ of the whole country.

A. middle B. center

center 可用来比喻某一方面占据重要位置常用 at the center of

middle 通常指事物两端之间的位置，常用词组为in the middle of

4. cheerful 愉快的，高兴的

He is ________ in his mind.

A. cheerful B .merry C. glad 他心情愉快。

cheerful 多指人天性乐观，在任何情况下都保持欣然的态度

merry 多指在节日或其他热闹场所表现出来的快乐情绪

Glad 暂时的喜悦

v. cheer 振奋，欢呼，喝彩 cheer up. 高兴起来

5. climate

I would rather live in France because of the _______.

A. weather B. climate

climate 指某地区的长时间的天气特征，特别是气温，降雨，刮风等总的气候情况

weather 指某地区短时间内的特殊气候变化，如晴，雨，雪，暖

6. certain

1) 一种，一个，指单数 a Mr Smith = some Mr Smith

2) 某一些 certain students =/ some students

3) 确定，有把握

Be certain of sth 对―――有把握

Be certain to do sth 一定要干某事

Sb be certain that / it is certain that

7. charge get / be / become charged

Vt. 1). 使充电，充满 charge the battery

be charged with = be filled with The bottle is charged with water.

2). 要价，收费 charge sb money for ---- 因―― 而收某人的钱。

He charged me 10 yuan for the book.

3). 控告某人 charge sb with sth The police charged him with driving after drinking.

4). 攻击。 The enemy charged us 3 times.

n. 1）费用 free of charge 免费 hotel charges 旅馆费

2）管，看管 in charge of ／take charge of 负责

in the charge of 由―― 负责

8. coast on the coast 在海岸 There are many ships resting on the coast.

Off the coast 在海上 There are a number of islands off the coast.

9. comfort

n 1) 安慰，舒适，安逸（不可数） She finds much comfort in her son.

2) 给予安慰的人／物，使人舒适的事（可数）

The hotel has many comforts.

A cup of hot milk is a comfort in the cols winter night.

3) in comfort We live in comfort.

Vt I tried to comfort him, but I could say nothing.

Adj comfortable The seat is comfortable to sit in.

adv comfortably.

10. conclusion 结论make/ reach / arrive at/ come to / draw a conclusion 下结论

11. condition

1) cn 条件，状况 in /under a good /bad condition(S)

2) conditions 情形，境况

3）表示身体的健康状况（不可数）

in condition 身体健康 out of condition 身体不好。

in the state of 处于某种状态

4） on condition that = if 如果，在―――的条件下，条件是――

I will lend the book to you on condition that you don’t lend it to others.

12. continue Vt / vi continue to do sth = doing sth =go on with =go on doing =keep on doing

继续做同一件事， go on to do 继续做另一件事。

13. conflict n / vi 矛盾，冲突，有分歧

In conflict 有矛盾，不一致 in conflict with sb 和――有矛盾／分歧

14．contact n 接触，联系

be in contact with 和―― 接触，有联系be out of contact with sb 脱离接触，失去联系

have contact with sb 和―― 有联系 lose contact with 和――失去联系

15. crazy a

1) be crazy for sth He is crazy for football.

2) be crazy about doing sth 疯狂干―― He is crazy about drinking .

16. cut off 切掉，切断，突然中止

Cut down 砍倒（树）削减 cut down on price /smoking

Cut in 插嘴，突然插入

Cut into 把―― 切成―― ，侵犯利益

1. date back(to )回溯至----

注意： date back to / date from 没有被动语态。多用于一般现在式。

date n 约会 Mary has a date with her secretary.

2. debt n债务 in debt 欠债 out of debt 不欠债

In debt to sb= in sb’s debt 欠某人的债 pay off the debt 还清债务

3．depend on 依靠，信赖，取决于

1） depend on sb /sth 相信／依靠某人 The price depends on the quality.

depend on sb to do sth 相信某人做某事 We can depend on itto solve the problem.

2）It all depends = That depends on it 看情况而定，不一定

3）depend on / insist on / ask for / see to it that----

We depend on it that he will come.

4. die down 变弱，平息，消失（强调结果）

die away （声音，光）渐渐消失，风渐渐平息（强调过程）

die out 灭绝，消失

5. direction n 方向，指导

a poor sense of direction 方向感差

in ---- direction = in the direction of --- 朝着―――的方向

in all directions = in every direction 朝四面八方

under the direction of 在―― 的指导下。

follow the direction 听从指导

6．Divide 分，划分，分开

divide between/among /with sb 在--- 之间分

divide sth into 把---分成 divide the apple into halves/ in two/in half

divide 把整体分为几部分

separate 把连在一起的或相邻的分割开

The world is divided into 7 continents.

The Tai wan strait separates Taiwan from Fu jian provience.

7. doubt 怀疑，疑惑 adj doubtful 不相信的，可疑的

n no doubt 无疑地，很可能 beyond a doubt 毫无疑问

Vt 怀疑，不信 I don’t doubt that he’ll come.

Vi 怀疑 + of/about He doubt about everything / He doubt of her success.

Doubt 后宾语从句中关联词的使用

1）肯定句时，名词从句用whether/if , when ,what 等连接

I doubt whether he’ll come.

2) 疑问句否定句时，名词从句用that 连接。

Does any one doubt that it is so? 它原如此，有人怀疑吗？

I don’t doubt that he will come.

Are you _______of success?

A. dreadful B. doubtful C. historical D. miserable

8. dress up 盛装，打扮，装饰

1）Dress vt dress sb /oneself 给--- 穿衣服

2）Be dressed in + 衣服，颜色 Dressed in red, he is difficult to recognize.

3) dress up in 穿---来打扮 People here like dressing up in ancient clothes..

4） dress up as 打扮成---的样子 The old man dressed up as Santa clause.

5) dress up for He is dressing up for his birthday party.

1. educate vt /vi 教育，培养，训练

1).educate sb in sth 教育某人在---方面

Parents should educate children in how to spent money.

2).educate sb to do 教育某人做某事

The teacher educates his students to behave well in class.

3) educate oneself 自学

4）adj educated 受教育的，有教养的

2．endless adj 无穷的，无限的

She is a woman with _____ patience.

A. ending B. endless C. enormous D. large

ending 结局，结尾 enormous 巨大的，庞大的，多指超过限度

large 大的，侧重面积，范围，容量

2. energy 能量，精力 (不可数) He has much energy.

1）adj energetic 精力旺盛的，有精力的

2） full of energy 精力充沛 burn up energy 燃烧能量

How much energy do you think you will burp up in the relay race?

Heat is a form of _______. A power B. force C. energy

Power 指电力，功率，权力等

Force 指自然力和人力，也指暴力等影响力

3．Exist vi 存在，生存

There exists a kind of power that can make you win.

N existence

People do not now believe in the _____ of ghosts.

A. birth B . evidence C .existence D. occurrence

4. explain n explanation 解释说明

Explain to sb sth (suggest / express/ announce/ say/metion)

Explain oneself = give reasons

Is there any _____ for his conduct?

A. expression B. explanation C. experiment

1. faith 信仰，信赖，诺言，信念

have faith in sb/sth 信任某人，某物

have faith that ----

lose one’s faith 失去信心

adj faithful 忠诚的 be faithful to sb 对某人忠诚

2. fame 名声，名望 rise to fame=come to fame 成功，成名

be famous / well-known for nice scenery/ as a writer / to all of us

As is known to us ,------- = It is known that ----

3. fever 发烧

have /catch a fever/ cold / stomachache/ headache/toothache

4. fasten 栓紧，抓紧，使固定

1） fasten---- to --- Fasten the horse to the tree.

2) fasten one’s eyes on 盯着某人看

5. firm adj 动作稳定而有力的，牢固的

Stand firm 坚定立场，坚定不屈

We firmly believe in your leading.

5. fit vt fit sb vi fit to do sth 适合做某事

adj keep /stay fit 保持健康

be fit for sth/sb

6． Focus n （兴趣，活动等）中心，焦点

She always wants to be the focus of attention.

In focus 焦点对准 out of focus 焦点没对准

Focus one’s attention on sth = fix one’s eyes on sth

All eyes were fixed/focused on him.

7． Fortunately adv 反义 unfortunately

Fortunate adj 幸运的，多指由于某种有利的境遇，使人得到未曾预料到的成功或好的机遇。

Lucky更加强调意外或偶然原因而得到成功

He made a ____ decision when he went into adertising.

n fortune 运气，命运，钱财，财产

Fortune knocks once at everyone’s door. 机会人人有，来了莫放手

Make a fortune 发财

1． gain vt 获得，增加gain/get/win the first prize

gain /earn/make one’s living

n 收获，增加 No pains, o gains.不劳无获

A fall into the pit,a gain in your wit. 吃一堑长一智

2． Generation 代

From generation to generation /from generation to another

3. gift 礼物，赠品；天赋，才能。

The album of paintings in this museum is a __from an old professor.

A. gift B.present C.talent

该博物馆的画集是一位老教授捐赠的。

Present与gift都可以做“礼物”讲，可互换，但gift有“捐赠”。

Gobang:五子棋 Go to ! 去你的的意思。 Gift做“天赋”讲时，与talent意思相近。

4．graduate {vt. 毕业。主语一般为学校。

{vi. 毕业 graduate from

{n. 大学毕业生

The university graduated 400 students this summer.

今年夏天，这所大学有400人毕业。

5．guide n. 导游，向导，指南，指导

Vt. 引导，指导。带领。

It was the government that guided the country through the difficulties ahead.

政府引导全国人民克服当前的困难。

guidance n. 指导。

under the guidance of 在…

6. get through

1).通过（检查，测试，海关，议案，方案，计划）

She got through the examination.

The message got through to us at last.这消息终于送到了我们这儿

Get through with one’s work 完成某人的工作

2）完成

How long did it take you to get through the letter?

We should get through the work ahead of the deadline.

3)get through on the phone. 接通电话

4）度过时间，花钱

We got through a fortune while we were on holiday.我们度假花了一大笔钱。

Go through 仔细检查，全面考虑，研究；经历

Go through the items one by one. 逐条研究

Go through two stages. 经历两个阶段。

1. handkerchief (pl) ---handkerchieves-handkerchiefs

2. heat

1） n 热，热量，热烈，压力a heat of five hundred degrees

2） vt heat --- to 把---加热到-- Heat the water to 100, it will boil.

3） n heating 供暖设备

4） adj. heated 热烈的 a heated discussion.

3. hold up 举起，拿起，举出

1）hold back 阻止 No one can hold back the wheel of history.

Hold sb back from doing sth 阻止某人做某事

2）hold down 压制，镇压。

3）hold in 约束，抑制。 Hold oneself in 抑制自己的感情

4）hold on 电话不挂上

The speaker hold on for a full hour. 演讲得人讲了整整一小时

5）hold on to 抓住---不放；坚持

In spite of various difficulities, he held on to the dream of returning to his homeland. 尽管困难重重，他始终没有放弃回到家乡的梦想

6）hold off 不接近，拖延

We hope the rain will hold off till evening.

我们希望这场雨能拖到明天晚上下。

7）hold out 伸出，坚持，不屈服

Hold out till victory. 坚持到胜利

4． honour

1) 荣誉，尊敬，名誉（不可数）

2）带来荣誉的人或事；荣幸

He is an honor of this school.

It is an honor for me to be invited to the party.

3) in honor of 纪念某人/向某人表示敬意

do sb honor= do honor to sb. 向某人表示敬意

4）。 Vt honor sb 向某人致敬

In order to honor him, I gave him some flowers.

5) sb be honored to do sth 很荣幸的做某事

I am honored to introduce Mr Smith.

1. imagination n . 想象， beyond the imagination超乎想象

想象力 have a strong/poor imagination

V imagine + n/pron/doing / 名词性从句

I can’t imagine going there without anybody else.

Adj imaginary 虚构的 imaginative 富有想象力的

2.Injury n 伤害，受伤处

receive/suffer an injury 受伤

do an injury to sb= do harm to 伤害某人

adj injured the injured

4. in order 按顺序，整齐（反义） out of order

order vt 1） order sb to do sth 要求某人做某事

2).ordered that ----(should ) do

He ordered that he should return next day. （虚拟）

His orders were to return next day., （虚拟）

3） order sth to be done 要求---被做

n 1). Place an order with sb for sth 和某人订购---

2）order from 从----订购

3） obey/break the order 服从/违背

5. inspire vt 鼓励，鼓舞，激发，启示

inspire sb sth 鼓励某人

inspire sb to do sth 鼓励某人做某事

His life of childhood inspired this novel.

What he said inspired me to cry.

adj inspiring 令人鼓舞的

Inspired 深受鼓舞的

His inspiring speech made us inspired.

6. intend vt 打算，将要

1). Intend sb to do sth Will you intend to stay long in London?

2) Intend to have done sth=had intended to do 本打算做而没做

I intended to have called on you, But I had an unexpected visitor.

3). Intend that + should do 倾向于---

We intended that the plan should carry out at once.

4). Sth be intended for 为---准备，专供---

These flowers were intended for your mother’s day.

1.keep up with 追赶，追上。

catch up with 赶上并超过

keep up 保持，使-不低落 keep up with the spirits.

come up with 提出

1． Lean 倚靠，倾斜

lean to/ towards 倾向于某种观点

He leaned to the view that we started of at once.

lean over 俯身在---上

lean on the table 靠着桌子

lean against the wall. 倚墙

2． Location 地方，位置

locate vt 使---坐落于-位于---

Their new house ___ by the river.他们的新房坐落于河边

A.lies in B. location C. is located D .is lied

be located = lie

3．lovely 好看的，可爱的，令人愉快的（口语）

a lovely child / a lovely landscape 明媚的景色

have a lovely afternoon. 过一个愉快的下午

live 活的，有生命的（与dead 相对）特指动物。

lively 活泼的，活跃的，栩栩如生的，生动的

The article gave a lively description on South American life.

文章对南美的生活做了生动的描述。

living 活着的

alive 活着的，现场直播的

4． Light vt light a candle

Vi The wood is hard to light.

Adj lighted a lighted candle.

light up 照亮，容光焕发，放光

1. major

1). 主要的，大部分

The major part/ aspect/ person

2). Vi 主修 major in English.

3）专业 I am an English major./ My major is English.

N majority the majority of ---

Compared with the majority, you are lucky.

2. mainly = mostly 主要的，大部分的

Many Europeans are mainly English settlers here.

3. make a good choice

make a fire / make friends with sb/ make noise / make war/ make sure /

make a face /make a face at sb / make fun of

4. make up

1）组成 5 girls and 6 boys made up the football team.

2）编造He made up a frightening story to frighten us.

3） = dress up 打扮，装扮，化装

4） Make up for 弥补 We should make up for the waste time.

5. make use of 利用

They don’t realize the use we made of the information.

他们没有意识到我们对信息的利用

They don’t realize the information we made use of.

6. mild 指生来情绪温和

gentle 指态度使人感到和蔼可亲，意思较mild 强

He could not say no to so many requests because he is a mild person.

对于众多的要求他不能说“不”，因为他是个温和的人

7． Manage 设法，经营，对付

1）. manage =run=operate They managed money well.

2) manage to do =succeed in doing 成功地做了某事

He tried to persuade me to give in, but he didn’t manage to .

3) 与can ,be able to ,could 连用，设法对付，设法办成

In spite of there is much trouble, they could manage to finish the work on time.

4) n manager 经理，经营者 management 管理，经营

8． Method with this method / in this way/ by this means

9. minority 少数的 the minority of

be in the/a minority 少数派

1. occur

1). Happen ,take place, come about ,occur

It occurred to me .

2). 出现，呈现= appear

The plants occurred only in Africa.

3). 浮现 A good idea occurred to me.

4). It happened /occurred to sb that 某人突然想起，突然发现---

It occurred to me that we could ask our neighbors to help us

2. operate

1).vt. 管理，经营操作

They operated a small company in the south of England.

It is easy to operate the machine.

2). Vi 运转，起作用

The medicine operates quickly.

3). Operate on/upon 动手术

The doctor operated on the injured man.

The injured man was operated on by the doctor.

3. opinion (不可数)

1). in one’s opinion = in one’s view

2). have a good/bad /worse opinion of sb.

1. pace 一步，速度，步调 He stands five paces behind me.

At the pace of three miles an hour 以每小时三英里的速度

At a slow/fast speed 走得快/慢

I f we want to keep up with the high pace of modern life ,we had better learn to make the right choices about what and how we eat.

2. part vi/vt 使分开/分离

Vi part from sb 与某人分开/分离/分手

N 部分；角色，作用；零件

We are parts of society.

Women are playing an important part in socialist construction.妇女在社会主义建设中起着非常重要的作用。

Part with 放弃，出让 I suggested him to part with the house.

3． pay off 还清债务

pay for 为某物/某人付钱；付钱买---；为-付出代价

pay back 偿还，回报

pay up 全部付清，按时还清

One day, you will _____ this foolish behavior.

A. pay B. pay for C. pay back D. pay off

4． Pick up 拾起，捡起；开车接某人

Pick out 挑出，辨别出

Pick on sb 挑剔某人

Pick off 摘下

At 7:30, I’ll drive over to ____ you ___ . Please get ready at that time.

A. pick, on B. pick; out C. pick ; up D. pick; off

The signal for help was ______ by another ship which happened to be at hand

篇15：高一必修4Unit1教案包(新课标版高一英语必修四教案教学设计)

Warming up

Teaching aims:

To introduce six great women and their achievements.

Teaching key points and difficult points:

To explain some words: Quaker, China Welfare Institute, campaign, etc.

Teaching procedures:

Step 1 Lead-in

1. Do you know any great people or important people? (Show some pictures to Ss)

2. What qualities make a great person?

(clever, brave, determined, confident, hard-working, unselfish, kind, active, generous…)

Step 2 Warming up

1. Pictures and Questions (Page 1)

Ask Ss read the introduction of six women and answer the following questions:

Elizabeth Fry: What did she do to help the prisoners?

Soong Qingling: Who is she? What’s her great achievement?

Jane Goodall: What’s her achievement in the study of Chimps?

Jody Williams: What did she get in 1997?

Joan of Arc: Do you know the name of the girl in ancient China whose experience was similar to her?

Lin Qiaozhi: What’s her major?

Step 3 Talking

1. Which of these women do you think is a great woman?

2. To be a great woman, what qualities do you think should she have? Look at the list of qualities that were discussed when we examined a great man. Are there any other qualities that you would like to add?

(intelligent, determined, generous, kind, modest, unselfish, hard-working, brave, confident,

considerate, thoughtful, energetic, imaginative, honest, decisive, sensible…)

Step 4 Discussion

1. Do you know a woman who really inspires (encourages) you? Describe her and explain why.

Tips: What does she look like? Why did she choose to …?

What do you think about..? What are her reputations?

Why do you admire her? What are her contributions?

How would you describe her?

2. Is it harder for women to become famous or get jobs in high positions? Why?

Step5 Language points

1. achieve vt./vi.

1) to get sth. done by working hard / as the result of an action or effort 完成；实现

The reason I achieve good results is because I work hard-and so could you.

我取得好成绩的原因是因为我学习努力。你也能够做到。

2) vi. succeed 成功；达到

He achieved because he was a hard worker. 他成功是因为他工作努力。

△achievement n.

As we climbed the final few metres, we felt a sense of achievement.

当我们爬完最后几米时，我们感到一种成功感。

2. condition n. [C/U] 条件；状况

The astronauts soon got used to the condition of weightlessness.

宇航员们很快就适应了失重的状态。

My computer’s a few years old, but it’s in really good condition.

我的电脑用了好几年了，但是性能还是很好。

3.concern onself with sb./sth. 关心某人/某事；为…担忧/烦恼

A teacher should love his students, and concern himself with their needs and desires.

老师应该爱护学生，关心他们的需求。

4. connection n.联系

connection between A and B A与B 的联系

Is there a connection between smoking and lung cancer? 吸烟和肺癌有联系吗?

connection with / to sth. 与…有联系

His failure has no connection with the quality of his work.他的失败与他的工作性质没有联系。

5. drive… out (of) : to force someone or something to leave 把…赶出去

The Chinese fought hard for 8 years and drove the Japanese aggressors out of China.

中国人民抗战八年,把日本侵略者赶出中国。

6. campaign n.战役；（政治或商业性）活动；运动

The plan of campaign had been made long before the war broke out.

作战计划早在战争爆发前就制定好了。

Bush’s campaign succeeded and he won the election again.布什竞选成功，再次当选总统。

Europe has started a campaign to stop people smoking.欧洲发起了一场戒烟运动。

△war, campaign, battle, fight/fighting 都与战争有关，但其规模排序为：

war >campaign >battle >fight/fighting

Gulf War 海湾战争 Huaihai Campaign 淮海战役

Pingxingguan Battle平型关大战 Battle of Waterloo 滑铁卢战役

△campaign, movement, activity 都与“活动”有关。campaign指为了达到某一目的而采取的一项或一系列积极有力的措施。如：an election campaign 竞选活动。

movement指社会或政治运动，如：the movement for national liberation 民族解放运动。还指移动、动作、姿势等。

activity多指消遣活动或教育活动，如：

Too many out-of-class activities take up too much of our precious time for study.

7. devote vt. to use all or most of your time, effort, etc. 献身；致力于；专心于

devoted adj. [to] loyal; caring a great deal; fond of 忠诚的；挚爱的

△devote sth. to sth. / doing sth. 献身于/致力于/专心于（做）某事

devote oneself to sth./ doing sth.

be devoted to sth. / doing sth.

△be devoted to sb. 对某人忠诚/喜爱某人

Soong Chingling devoted all her life to the Chinese revolution and construction.

宋庆龄一生致力于中国的革命和建设事业。

a devoted wife / friend / father 忠诚的妻子/忠实的朋友/关怀备至的父亲

Step 6 Assignments

1. Revise the new words.

2. Discuss the two questions in “Pre-reading”.

3. Preview “Reading”.

Unit 1 Women of achievement

The First Period Reading

Teaching goals 教学目标

1． Target language 目标语言

a. 重点词汇

achieve, achievement, condition, welfare, institute, connection, campaign, organization, specialist, behave, behavior, worthwhile, nest, observe, observation, respect, argue, entertainment, inspire, support, devote ... to

b. 重点句子

Watching a family of chimps wake up is our first activity of the day. P2

Everybody sits and waits while the animals in the group begin to wake up and move. P2

But the evening makes it all worthwhile. P2

... we see them go to sleep together in their nest for the night. P2

Only after her mother came to help her for the first few months was she allowed to begin her project. P2

For forty years Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals. P2

2． Ability goals 能力目标

a. Learn Warming Up, and know how to tell the great women and the famous women.

b. Learn the way to describe a person from what the person did, what she/he looks like and so on.

3． Learning ability goals 学能目标

Teach Ss how to describe a person.

Teaching important points 教学重点

a. By reading A protector of African wildlife, students can learn from Jane Goodall in at least two aspects: one is what is the humane way to study animals; the other is that it was her great personality - universal love and mercy（博爱与慈悲）that made her successful. If everyone had such kind of heart, they would give everything benefit for all living things. Then our world will be full of love and peace, without any war and starvation.

b. Ask students to answer these questions:

1) What made her a great success?

2) What should we learn from Jane Goodall?

Teaching difficult points 教学难点

Let everyone believe that all of us can become Jane Goodall.

Teaching methods 教学方法

Inspiration, Questioning and Discussion.

Teaching aids 教具准备

A computer, a projector and a recorder.

Teaching procedures & ways 教学过程与方式

StepⅠLead-in

T: Good morning, everyone! Haven’t seen you for a long time. Did you have a good time in your holidays? What did you do during the holidays?

S1: Yes, I had a good time. You know I enjoy movies, sports and other types of entertainment. I saw several favorite films and every afternoon, I would play basketball with my friends.

S2: I would die of boredom. I didn’t know what to do but read. I didn’t know how to relax myself. I just hoped that the new term began. The sooner, the better.

T: That sounds interesting. In fact, boredom is a kind of feeling. There is a good way to be away from it. Believe it or not, that is to help others, no matter who they are, human being or animals. Have a try, Ok? Today we’ll learn Unit 1. It introduces several women to us and tells us how they live and work. Now let’s turn to Page 1. Look at these pictures and the brief introductions, then work in pairs to discuss which of these women you think is a great woman. You need to give your reasons for your choice.

Give students 3 minutes to do this task, and then ask some of them to speak out their choices. Teacher should give them some guide. For example, what is her ambition? What are the problems she met? And what are her sacrifices? After that the teacher can refer to the chart on Page 11 in the reference book. And then give them a brief summary about their discussion.

A sample summary:

As great women, they don’t care for themselves at all, and at some point or rather, they must give some sacrifices, just like Lin Qiaozhi, she devoted all her life to medical work for Chinese women and children and had chosen not to have a family of her own. Instead, she made sure that about 50,000 babies were safely delivered to their mothers. Not all people can do this. Once they have chosen their careers, they would carry on with them without any withdrawal. What they did is encouraging thousands of people to continue their careers. Those who are only famous but not great can’t be matched.

StepⅡReading

There are four tasks in this step:

a. Pre-reading to find the main idea of each paragraph.

b. Making a chart of the text structure.

c. Language points.

d. Comprehending.

Task 1 Pre-reading

There are 3 paragraphs in the text, and each one has its main idea. These main ideas support the title A protector of African wildlife. Teacher can give students some time to read the text quickly and find these main ideas to form a overview of the text.

T: How many paragraphs are there in the text?

Ss: Three.

T: What are the main ideas of theirs?

S1: The first paragraph is about a day in Combe National Park.

S2: The second one tells us how Jane Goodall did her research and the achievement she has made in her research.

S3: The third one tells us her influence to the world.

T: OK. Can we divide the text in this way? There are four paragraphs in the text. The first one is about a day in the park. The second one is her way of doing her research and some achievement. The third one is her attitude and feeling to the animals. And the last one is a short summary to her.

Ss: That’s right.

T: Thanks. Well, let’s draw a chart of the text together according to the main ideas we’ve found.

Task 2 Making a chart

A protector of African wildlife

↓

① ② ③

│ ∣ ∣

A day in the park Jane’s way to study chimps Her attitude to and her achievement the animals

↓

④

She has achieved everything she wanted to do.

Task 3 Language Points

T: By now, we have mastered the main idea and the details. Do you have some difficulties in the language?

S1: Yes. What does this sentence mean: “Watching a family of chimps wake up is our first activity of the day”?

T: Who’d like to help her?

S2: The subject of the sentence is a “V-ing form”, and the Predicate is “is” not “wake up”. So the meaning of the sentence is: 今天我们的第一件事是观察一个猩猩家庭的早起。

T: That’s right. Sometimes we should depend on the structure of the sentences to help us understand the meaning.

S3: Miss Wu, the sentence: “This means going back to a place where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before.” is beyond me.

T: This sentence is a little difficult. First, it includes an Attributive Clause. The clause is: where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before. Second, there are two structures in the sentence. One is “to mean doing”; the other is “leave ... doing”. For the first one, we can refer to the Appendices in Page 76. Now let’s look at the second one. In fact, there are several same structures in this text. Please look at these sentences.

Show the sentences on the screen:

1. ... where we left the chimp family sleeping in a tree the night before.

2. ... we see them go to sleep together in their nest for the night.

3. But the evening makes it all worthwhile.

4. ... was she allowed to begin her project.

5. ... Jane Goodall has been helping the rest of the world understand and respect the life of these animals.

T: Now look at the boldface（黑体字）. All the structures of the Predicates are Verb + Object + Object Complement. Let’s translate these sentences to taste the meaning and usage of Object Complement.

Ask some of the students to translate these sentences. Give them some explanations: When we use -ing form as Object Complement, it means this act is continuing. For example, Sentence 1. When we use -to do form as Object Complement, it means this process of the act has finished or to begin. We can take Sentence 2 and 4 for example. When we use an objective as Object Complement, it means that it shows us a kind of state. We can take sentence 3 and 5 for example. If possible, teacher still can give them more examples about this structure.

I heard the teacher call my name.

I will let you know the result of the voting as soon as possible.

We watch the children diving into the water from the top diving board.

Let’s go, let him alone.

S4: Miss Wu, I find this sentence a bit strange: Only after her mother came to help her for the first few months was she allowed to begin her project.

T: Yeah, this sentence uses the structure of inversion. The sign is that only phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence. We will learn it later. Now it is Ok that you know the meaning of the sentence. Any questions?

Ss: No.

Task 4 Comprehending

T: Do you still have any questions? No? Ok, let’s finish next task. Read the text again and try to finish Exercise 1&2 in Page 3 as quickly as you can.

Give students some time to do this. After that, check the answers with the whole class.

Step Ⅲ Discussion

When we are guiding students to read something, besides hoping that they can learn some basic knowledge the material shows, we still hope they can learn something that can reflect the spirit of human being. This is the most important thing a teacher should show to students.

Ask students to work in groups of four and discuss the following questions:

1.What made her a great success?

2.What should we learn from Jane Goodall?

T: I think, there is not a single person who doesn’t admire success. But what is the way to succeed? Now we have read Jane Goodall, can you make sure what made her a great success, and what we should learn from her? Please discuss these two questions, and then some of you will report your opinions to all the class.

Give students some time to discuss.

T: Boys and girls, have you finished your discussion? How about your group?

G1: We think that there are two points that made her successful. One is her way to study chimps, and the other is her true love to the animals. The first one is facile (易做到的), because it is only a way. Everyone can do it. But for the second one, it is more easily said than done. As a woman, she gave up everything, went to the forest to study the chimps and devoted all her love to these animals. It is really not easy. What we cannot understand is that how she has such great personality.

T: These are very interesting questions. As far as I know, it is her relief that raised her personality. Everything is equal, no matter what they are. It isn’t because we are human being that we are superior to the other living thing. We don’t have any right to control other living thing. We all live on the same planet, they are our brothers or sisters. The only difference is that we have different shapes and have different wisdom. If you have the same love to the things around you, you can turn to be her. OK, how about the second question?

G2: At first, we admire she had the wisdom and courage to give up her chance to go to university and went to Africa to begin her own research. This makes us think over what we should think when we are choosing our majors or a university. Secondly, most of us think that man is the master of the world, because he is the most intelligent animal on the earth. So he can decide every thing he thinks right, including doing some experiments on animals, in spite of their pains. Jane not only saw this, but also tried her best to help them and argued for them to be left in the wild and not used for entertainment or advertisements. What she said in the text is very moving. It shows her deeply love to the animals. We should learn this from her. In fact, there are so much we should learn from her, her consideration, her hard work and so on.

StepⅣ Listening

Have a listening. Let students listen to the reading material, follow and repeat it, pay attention to the new words and expressions, as well as the sentence structures they have learned just now.

StepⅤ Homework

T: I’m very glad to hear what you said. You have learned what you should learn from Jane Goodall. And I believe you will be Jane Goodall, if you treat everything around you equally and show your love to them. Now time is up. Today’s homework is to finish the exercises in Page 4 and 5. Make some preparations for the next class. See you next time.

Ss: See you.

Grammar

Teaching goals

1. Target language

a. Important phrases.

achievement, inspire, worthwhile, observe, institute, respect , condition, argue, entertainment

b. Key sentences.

Our group are all going to visit the chimps in the forest

Our group includes six boys and five girls.

2.Ability goals

a. Enlarge vocabulary by learning word-formation.

b. Learn to use Subject-verb agreement correctly.

3.Learning ability goals

Teach students how to enlarge vocabulary by word-formation and how to use subject-verb agreement. Teaching important points

Noun Suffix in word-formation.

Subject-verb agreement of collective nouns.

Teaching difficult points

Enable students to use collective nouns correctly, by understanding their meanings in certain situations.

Teaching methods

Let students do the exercises, and then collect their answers. Ask them to conclude the rules and then give them some explanation.

Teaching aids

A projector.

Teaching procedures & ways

Step I Revision

Review the text by checking the answers for Exercises 2, 3 and 4 on Page 4 and 5. These exercises are about the useful words that appear in the text.

Step II Word-formation

There are two tasks in this part. One is leading in, in which teacher trys to give students as many words as possible. Let them guess the meanings of the words. The second one is to finish Exercise 1 on Page 4.

Derivation is one of the most important word-formation. It is helpful in enlarging students' vocabulary. Teachers can give them enough words, and let them guess the meaning of these words. As a result of this, students will be interested in the word-formation, and begin to use the method to guide their word study in their daily life.

T: Just now we reviewed some words in the text. Now please look at these words on the screen and say the meanings of them.

Organize Organization State Statement

Discuss Discussion Entertain Entertainment

Direct Direction Consider Consideration

Decide Decision Agree Agreement

Prepare Preparation Achieve Achievement

Inform Information Treat Treatment

Deter- Determination Improve Improvement

Express Expression Encourge Encouragement

Examine Examination Enjoy Enjoyment

Educate Education Govern Government

Feel Feeling Find Finding

Begin Beginning Mean Meaning

T: From the above chart we can see that with knowledge of word-formation, we can enlarge our vocabulary. Today, we'll focus our attention on the Noun Suffix. There are many Noun Suffixes in English. In this unit, we'll learn -ment, -ing, -ation, -ist and so on. Now let's finish Exercise 1 in Page 4.

Let students finish Exercise 1. Check their answers with the whole class.

T: Here are some other noun Suffixes on the screen. Read it and write down them in your note books. Noun Suffix

-er(fighter) -or(sailor) -ist(artist)

-ant(assistant) -ee(employee) -ian(librarian)

-tion(attention) -ment(government) -dom(freedom)

-ness(carefulness) -ism(socialism) -ship(friendship)

-ure(pleasure) -ty(society) -ence(reference)

Let students do it, and then check the answers with the whole class.

Step III Discovering useful structures

Tell students what they should do next. Ask them to read the EXAMPLE in Exercise 1 on Page 5. Make sure that they know what they should do. Finish Exercise 1, and check the answers.

T: Do you have any questions?

Ss: Sometimes it's difficult to decide whether the meaning of the subject tends to single or plurality. T: This is a good question. Although we know that if the word refers to different members, use a plural, and if the word is considered as a whole, use a singular verb, we still find it is difficult to use this in our practice. I think what we should do is to practice again and again. Try to experience the meaning of the word in the situation. That's the way to solve this problem. Ok, let's finish Exercise 2 on Page 5.

Let students do it. They can have a discussion to check the answers. After that, check with the whole class, to fact teacher should enlarge this structure for students. Die grammar chart in the reference book on Page 5, is a good one to let students know more about subject-verb agreement. If possible teacher could show all the grammar knowledge to students. This is especially useful for those who would like to learn English Grammar.

1．两个或两个以上做主语的单数名词用and连接，谓语用复数．

Tom and Dick _______ (be) good friends.

但若表示一个集合体时则用单数。

A singer and dancer ______ (be) present at the party.

The worker and writer ___ (be) talking to the students.

Bread and butter ________ (taste) good.

(a needle and thread, a horse and cart, a watch and chain, a coat and tie, truth and honesty, medical help and cure)

2．用 and 连接的两个名词若被 no, each, every, many a 修饰，则谓语动词用单数。

No bird and no beast ______ (be) seen in the bare island.

Many a boy and many a girl ______ (have) made such a funny experiment.

At Christmas each boy and each girl _____(be) given a present.

3．两个主语由not only…but also, or, either…or, neither…nor 等连接时，谓语动词与第二个主语保持一致．

Either he or I _____ (be) to go there.

______ (be) either you or he going to attend the meeting?

4.主语后有as well as, like, with, together with, but, except, besides,等，谓语应于前面主语保持一致．

A professor, together with some students, _____ (be) sent to help in the work.

No one but the teachers _____ (be) allowed to use the room.

5．一些集合名词做主语，如果看作一个整体，谓语动词用单数；如果指其中的成员，谓语用复数．如audience, committee，class(班级),crew（全体船员或机组人员), family, government, public(公众)等，

但people, police, cattle等只能用复数．

My family _____ (be) a big family.

My family _____ (be) listening to the radio.

The police ____ (be) trying to catch the thief.

6.通常作复数的集体名词

有些集体名词，如police, people, cattle, militia, poultry(家禽),)等，通常作复数，用复数动词。例如：

Domestic cattle ______(provide) us with milk, beef and hides.

7.通常作不可数名词的集体名词

有一些集体名词，如machinery, equipment, furniture, merchandise (商品)，clothing 通常作不可数名词，随后的动词用单数。例如：

The merchandise _____(have) arrived undamaged.

All the machinery in the factory ____ (be) made in China.

8．表示时间、重量、长度等名词，尽管是复数形式，但作为一个整体看，谓语还是用单数。

Five minutes ______ (be) enough.

One dollar and seventy eight cents _____ (be) what she has.

9. all 作为主语，代表人物时，一般用作复数；代表整个事件或情况时，一般看作单数。

All that I want _____ (be) a good dictionary.

All ______ (be) silent. 人人都缄口无言。万籁俱寂。

All ______ (be) out of danger.

10．形容词加定冠词 the 表示一类人时，谓语动词用复数。

What a life the poor were living!

The young _____happy to give their seats to the old.

11．who, which, that 作定语从句的主语时，其谓语取决于先行词。

Those who want to go should sign your names here.

He is one of the students who have passed the exam.

He is the only one of the students who has passed the exam.

12. 以-ics结尾的学科名称

某些以-ics结尾的学科名称，如physics(物理学)、mathematics(数学)、mechanics(机械学)、politics(政治学)、statistics(统计学)、economics(经济学)、linguistics(语言学）athletics(体育学)、等，通常作单数用。例如：

13. 其他以-s结尾的名词

英语中有一些由两个部分组成的物体名称通常是以-s结尾，如scissors(剪子)，pincers(钳子)，glasses(眼镜），shorts(短裤)，trousers(裤子)，suspenders(吊裤带)等。这一类名词，如果不带“一把”、“一副”、“一条”等单位词而单独使用，通常作复数。例如：

如果带有单位词，则由单位词的单、复数形式决定动词的单、复数形式。例如：One pair of scissors isn't enough.

14.以-s结尾的地理名称

某些以-s结尾的地理名称，如果是国名，如the United States, the United Nations, the Netherlands等，尽管带有复数词尾，但系单一政治实体，故作单数用。但若不是国名，而是群岛、山脉、海峡、瀑布等地理名称、通常作复数用。例如：

The West Indies, apart from the Bahamas, are commonly divided into two parts. The Himalayas（喜马拉雅山脉) have a magnificent variety of plant and animal life.

The Straits of Gibraltar have not lost their strategic importance.

15. 英语中还有一些以-s结尾的名词，如:

arms(武器), clothes(衣服), contents(内容，目录) fireworks(烟火), goods(货物), minutes(记录), morals(道德，品行), remains(遗体), stairs(楼梯), suburbs (郊区), thanks(谢意), wages(工资)等，

通常作复数。

16.凡是由-ings结尾的名词，如: clippings (剪下来的东西), diggings (掘出的东西), earnings (收入), filings (锉屑), lodgings (租住的房屋), surroundings (环境), sweepings (扫拢的垃圾) 等, 通常作复数用。例如：

The clippings of the hedges are usually burnt.

The sweepings of the godown(仓库) have been disposed of.

17. 还有一些以-s接的单、复数同形的名词，如: headquarters(总部), means(方法、手段), series(系列), species(种类), works(工厂)等，随后动词的单、复数形式取决于这些名称是作单数，还是用作复数。例如：

A headquarters was set up to direct the operation (指挥作战).

Their headquarters are in Paris.

The only means to achieve success is to appeal to arms (诉诸武力).

18. remains用于“遗体”意义时，随后的动词通常作复数：

His remains lie in the churchyard.

The martyr's remains were buried at the foot of the hill.

但作“遗迹”或“剩余物”解释时，可作复数或单数用：

Here is the remains of a temple.

The remains of the meal were/was fed to the dog.

19. 如果作主语的名词词组由“分数(或百分数)+of-词组”构成，其动词形式依of-词组中名词类别而定。例如：

Two thirds of the swampland(沼泽地) _____ (have) been reclaimed(开垦).

Over sixty per cent of the city ____ (be) destroyed in the war.

Thirty-five per cent of the doctors ______ (be) women.

20. 如果主语是all of ...,some of ...,none of ...,half of ...,most of ...等表示非确定数量的名词词组，其后的动词形式依of-词组中的名词类别而定。例如：

Most of the money _____ recovered by Deputy Player.

Most of the members ______ there.

All of the cargo ______ lost.

All of the crew ______ saved.

21.两数相减或相除，动词用单数；两数相加或相乘，动词可用单数，也可用复数。例如：

Forty minus fifteen (40-15) leaves twenty-five.

Forty divided by eight (40/8) is five.

Seven and five (7+5) makes/make twelve.

Five times eight (5+8) is /are forty.

22. 如果主语是由“a kind/sort/type of ,this kind/sort/type of +名词”构成，动词用单数。例如：

This kind of man annoys me.

但若在kind/sort/type之前的限定词是these/those,同时，of-词组中的名词又是复数，则动词用复数：

These kinds of men annoy me.

Those types/sorts of machines are up to date.

23.如果主语是由“many a+名词”或“more than one +名词”构成，其意义虽属多数，但随后的动词仍遵循“语法一致”原则，用单数。例如：

Many a man has done his duty.

More than one game was lost.

24. 1)由who, why, how, whether等wh-词引导的名词性分句作主语，其后的动词通常用单数。

2).两个由and连接的并列名词性分句作主语，如果主语表示两件事情，动词用复数。例如：

What caused the accident and who was responsible for it remain a mystery to us.

3). 以what-分句作主语的SVC结构

在以what-分句作主语的SVC结构中，主句补语是复数名词，如果主句谓语动词可用复数。

25. 1).在“one of+复数名词+关系分句”结构中，关系分句动词通常依照语法一致原则用复数形式。例如：

Joan is one of those people who go out of thier way to be helpful.

2). 在这类结构之前有定冠词the或者有the only 等限定词和强调词时，关系分句动词形式依one而定，用单数。例如：

Selfishness is the one of her many faults which defeats itself.

Listening

Teaching goals

1. Target language

Men have more chances to get to the top of their career than women.

Why did Joan have to dress up as a man to become a solider?

2. Ability goals

Enable students to know something about Joan and let students realize women can be the same success as men and know something about the International Campaign to Ban landmines.

3. Learning ability goals

Help students learn how to get required information by listening.

Teaching important and difficult points

Train to get the key words by reading the questions before listening.

Teaching methods

Instruction and practice.

Teaching aids

A recorder.

Teaching procedures & ways

Step I Revision

T: Pleased to meet you again!

Ss: Me, too.

T: Zhao, why do you look so tired?

S; He stayed up yesterday.

T: Why?

S: Don't listen to him. I just have had a cold.

T: You'd better, have some thicker clothes. The weather is rather cold these days.

S: Thank you, Miss Wu.

T;: Now, let's begin our class. Have you finished your homework?

Ss: Yes.

T: Well, now I'll show you answers on the screen. Check your answers by yourselves. If you have any questions, please let me know. After doing this, teachers can continue the next step.

Step II Listening to the material on Page 7

There are three tasks in this step: the first listening, the second listening and the third listening. Teachers should ask students to glance the whole exercises before listening, so that they can realize what is the main task in listening.

Task 1 The first listening

T: Hello, everyone! Glad to meet you. These days the topic we are talking is important women & great women. We know women can achieve the same as

men. But they have many difficulties in doing this. Today we'll have three listening materials to listen. The first one tells us some particular problems, which women have when they want a career of their own. The structure of this material is very clear. It is organized by the first, second and third paragraph. So when you listen for the first time, try to get the general idea of the material and think which sentences are the main ideas of the three paragraphs. Now let's listen for the first time. Play the tape for the first time for students to get the main ideas of the paragraphs. And then ask students to try to retell what they have heard. It doesn't matter whether they

are some details, such as words or sentences, or they are some main ideas. Because the purpose of doing this is to let students know they have caught some information. Everything is OK.

Collect what they have heard and write down them on the blackboard. Teachers can let them discuss which are main ideas and which are details.

Task 2 The second listening

There are two purposes in this task. One is to let students finish Exercise 2; the other is to let students get some useful information to finish Exercise 1 and 3. So after the discussion, teachers can let students look through the Exercises on Page 7 in order to catch the useful information to finish the exercises when they are listening. Then play the tape again, and try to finish Exercise 1&2. Exercise 1 is about some details. Exercise 2 is about the main ideas of each paragraph. Teacher can make a pause, and repeat it where the main ideas appear to make sure students can catch it.

Task 3 The third listening

This is a good chance for students to check their answers. After listening twice, most students can have a good understanding about the material, and can write down the answers mostly. So this time is for their checking and adding their answers.

If they still have some difficulties, play the tape for the fourth time to meet their needs.

Step III The listening material on Page 41

Teacher can ask students to guess the content of the material, according to the questions in exercises. And then have a listening and finish the exercises. The steps of the listening are the same with the above one.

Step IV Listening material on Page 44

This is a short dialogue between Jody Williams and a journalist. If students want to know something about the dialogue, they must pay attention to the questions. Ex 2 in the Listening Task offers some information. They can guide students to get what they are required to get. So it is necessary to tell students to read the chart carefully ahead, and then listen to the tape. Students can write down some notes instead of the whole sentences.

Step V Homework

T: Today, we learned something about women. I believe what they did and what they are facing may give us some inspirations. For girls we should believe that although we may face some difficulty, we are able to try our best to realize our dreams. OK, today's homework is to read the article A GOOD EXAMPLE FOR ME and make some preparations for the speaking in Page 7. That's all for today, bye, everyone.

Ss: Bye, teacher.

For most students it is difficult to finish all the three listening materials in one class. So teachers can make one of them as homework, let students listen to it after class.

篇16：unit 17 Famous women peiod2(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

The Second Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Train the students' reading ability.

2.Learn and master the following words and phrases:

1)Words:mile Antarctic stormy threaten optimistic somehow shelter regret extreme climate value

2)Phrases:struggle through threaten to do sth. lie down be thankful for in good health struggle to one's feet make a decision

Teaching Important Points:

1.Improve the students' reading ability.

2.Enable the student to understand the text better.

3.Let the students have strong wills and determination by reading the passage.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to improve the students' reading ability.

2.The use of some useful expressions.

Teaching Methods:

1.Discussion before reading to make the students be interested in what they learn in class.

2.Fast reading to get the general idea of the text.

3.Careful reading to answer some detailed questions.

4.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a map of the world

2.a tape recorder

3.a projector and some slides

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ. Greetings

Greet the whole class as usual.

Step Ⅱ. Revision

T:Yesterday we learned some new words describing people's qualities.Can you make sentences with those words?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.One word,one sentence.Who can try first?

S1:generous He is generous with his money.

S2:cheerful He came into the classroom with a cheerful look.

S3:mean He is mean over money matters.

S4:warm-hearted The woman is a warm-hearted person,who often helps others.

S5:cold-hearted The man is very cold-hearted,who is unwilling to help other people.

S6:tense It was a tense game.

S7:miserable In the old days,they lived a miserable life.

S8:dishonest The boy is dishonest,who often tells lies.

T:Well done.

Step Ⅲ. Pre-reading

T:(Teacher hangs a map of the world on the blackboard.)Now,look at the map of the world.Discuss the questions on the screen with your partner.You're given five minutes to have a discussion.After that,I'll ask some of you to report the results of your discussion.OK?

Ss:OK.

(Teacher shows the screen.)

1.Imagine you are travelling alone to the South Pole,what will you take with you?Why?

2.Do you know the names of three countries that are part of the North Pole?What about the South Pole?

3.Which animals live on the North Pole?And which on the South Pole?

4.Why do polar bears never eat penguins?

T:(Five minutes later.)Have you finished?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Who'd like to answer the first question?

S9:I'd like to.I'll take warm clothes,good shoes,a good map,food and a cellphone.Because it is very cold there,wearing warm clothes is necessary to keep warm.A good map is helpful for me to tell the directions.A cellphone can help me stay in touch with my family and friends.

T:Very good.Do you agree with him/her?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Let's go on.The second question,who can try?

S10:I'll try.I know which countries are part of the North Pole.They are:Norway,Sweden,Finland.There is no country which is a part of the South Pole.

T:You're right.Sit down,please.The third question?

S11:There are polar bears.Arctic foxes and whales living on the North Pole.Penguins,dolphins,sea lions and seals live on the South Pole.

T:Quite right.The last question.Can you try,Wang Li?

S12:Yes.Polar bears live on the North Pole,while penguins live on the South Pole,so they never meet each other.

T:Well done.Sit down,please.

Step Ⅳ. Fast-reading

T:Today we're going to read a text about an expedition.It's about Helen Thayer's expedition to the South Pole,Who is a very brave woman.Before we read it,let's deal with the new words in the period.(Teacher and the students read the new words,and the teacher may give explanations if necessary.)

T:OK.Open your books and turn to Page 23.Let's look at Reading.Read the passage quickly,get the general idea and then answer the following questions on the screen.(Teacher shows the questions on the screen.)

1.How did the writer celebrate her 60th birthday?

2.Has she ever been to the North Pole?When?

3.What happened to her during the journey?

4.Why did she say it was an experience she would never forget and would value for the rest of her life?

Now,I'll give you five minutes to go through the passage and find the answers to the questions.After that,I'll ask some of you to answer the questions.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:Good.Please begin.

(Five minutes later,the teacher asks some students to read out their answers.)

Suggested answers:

1.The writer travelled to the South Pole to celebrate her 60th birthday.

2.Yes.At 50,she travelled alone to the North Pole.

3.One day,she fell into an icy hole and was hanging on the ropes tied to the sled.The next morning,she had a bad accident with the sled and hurt her leg.

4.Because she met the challenges of solo travel in an extreme climate and succeeded in finishing her travel to the South Pole.

Step Ⅴ. Reading

T:Well,read the passage carefully and try to get as much information as you can.After a while,we'll do Ex.1 in Post-reading.(Teacher gives the students a few minutes to read it carefully.After finishing it,the students need to choose the best answer to each question on Page 24.)

Suggested answers:

1)B 2)D 3)A 4)D 5)D

Step Ⅵ. Language Study

T:Now you're familiar with the passage.But you should also pay attention to some useful phrases.Let's look at their usages.(Show the following on the screen.)

1.struggle through

e.g.The soldiers struggled through the snowstorm.

2.threaten to do sth.

e.g.It threatens to rain.

3.lie down

e.g.The wind finally lay down.

4.be thankful (to sb.)for

e.g. I'm thankful to you for all this help.

5.be in good/bad/poor health

e.g.She was in poor health when she was young.

6.make a decision

e.g.She made a decision to travel alone to the Great Wall.

(Bb:struggle through,threaten to do sth.,lie down,be thankful(to sb.)for,be in good/bad/poor health,make a decision)

Step Ⅶ. Listening and Consolidation

T:Now I'll play the tape.You can follow it in a low voice.Pay attention to your pronunciation and intonation.

(After that,the teacher asks the students to discuss the last two questions in Post-reading in groups of four.)

T:OK.Now look at the last two questions.(Teacher begins to read them.)I give you a few minutes to discuss them in groups of four.After a while,I'll ask some of you to talk about your opinions.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Begin,please.

(Teacher goes among the students and joins them in their discussion.)

T:(After a while.)Are you ready?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Who'd like to describe Helen Thayer in a few sentences?

S13:I'll try.Helen Thayer is a woman who loves life and likes adventure travel.She has a strong will and perseverance.She dares to challenge an unknown field,meanwhile,she is also very optimistic.

T:Very good.Sit down,please.The last question.Who can try?

S14:I can try.Yes,I admire Helen Thayer very much.Because she is very brave and strong.She never gives up when she meets with difficulties.

T:Well down.What about you,Li Hua?

S15:I also admire her very much.Because she is never satisfied with what she has had.She has the spirit of adventure and a strong will.

T:Quite right.Helen Thayer is really a woman who inspires us.I also admire her very much.

Step Ⅷ. Summary and Homework

T:In this peiod,we've read a passage about the expedition of a woman called Helen Thayer.We've learnt a lot from her,for example,where there is a will,there is a way;Nothing is impossible to a willing heart.(Write the two sentences on the Bb.)Besides,we've also learnt some useful expressions.After class,read the passage again and again until you can retell the story in your own words.At last,don't forget to preview“Word study and Grammar”in the next period.Well,that's all for today.Class is over.

Step Ⅸ. The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 17 Famous women

The Second Period

Ⅰ.Phrases:

struggle through threaten to do sth. lie down be thankful(to sb.)for be in good/bad/poor health make a decision

Ⅱ.Where there is a will,there is a way.Nothing is impossible to a willing heart.

Step Ⅹ. Record after Teaching

_____________________________________

篇17：unit 17 Famous women peiod1(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

Unit 17 Famous women

Ⅰ.Teaching Goals:

1.Learn to describe people.

2.Talk about the reason why we admire famous women.

3.Study the rules of Subject-Verb Agreement.

4.Write a fan letter.

Ⅱ.Teaching Time:

Five periods

Ⅲ.Background Information:

1.Madame Curie

Marie was born in Poland in 1867.She was given the name Marie Sklodowska by her parents.Her father was a teacher.Everyone soon saw that Marie had a quick mind.

Marie's mother died when her youngest daughter was only ten.This made Marie know that she must work hard at her lessons if she wanted to be successful in her life.So she did and won top honors at her school.Marie and her elder sister,Bronya,dreamed of studying in France.But their father did not have enough money to send them there.Then Marie made out a plan:She would teach at home and send her money to Bronya.After her sister finished studying in Paris,she could get work and send Marie the money to study there in return.With tears in their eyes the girls said goodbye to each other,and Marie worked very hard for six years to pay for her sister's studies.At last it was Marie's turn,but by the time she got to France,her sister was married and could not give her much help.

Again Marie worked,she studied in a small room without heat or light.She lived on bread and tea most of the time,but what she cared of most was her science-her study and her research work.This was her world,and she liked her experiment most.

In Paris she met and married Pierre Curie,a young famous scientist.Together they made their experiments in an old house.The Curies were awarded the Nobel Prize for their great contribution to science.In 1911 Madame Curie received another Nobel Prize.It is the only time in history that two Nobel Prizes have been given to the same person,and this person was a woman.

Marie Curie,an extraordinary woman scientist with extraordinary success discovered a hidden power from which the world benefits much.It was this same power,however,that killed her in 1934.

2.Helen Keller

Helen Keller was born in America in June,1880.Everything was all right when she was born.But when she was nineteen months old,an attack of fever left her blind and deaf for the rest of her life.She became blind so young that as she grew older,she did not remember being able to see;and she became deaf before she had any idea of the importance of human speech.She lived in darkness and silence.

As she grew older,she,too,wanted to express her ideas and feelings.But she realized that she was cut off from others.

Her parents were greatly worried.How could anyone get in touch with Helen's mind and intelligence in darkness and silence without speech?Helen was nearly seven before a teacher was found.Her name was Miss Sullivan.

Miss Sullivan had a lot of difficulties in teaching Helen Keller.As the child could neither see nor hear,she had to use manual alphabet.But Helen's energy and intelligence and strong spirit,combined with Miss Sullivan's skill and patience,overcame all the difficulties.As Helen grew up,she became an able student,passed examinations and finally took a university degree in English literature.She then devoted all herself to helping the blind and the deaf.Her personal success,together with the work she has done for others,made her one of the greatest women in modern times.She wrote many books and “The Story of My Life” is a remarkable one.

The First Period

Teaching Aims:

1.Learn and master the following:

inspire generous cheerful mean warm-hearted cold-hearted tense miserable dishonest

2.Train the students' listening ability.

3.Improve the students' speaking ability by talking and discussing in pairs or groups.

4.Make the students know the fact that they will succeed as long as they work hard.

Teaching Important Points:

1.Train the students' listening ability.

2.Master some words describing people and use them correctly.

Teaching Difficult Points:

1.How to improve the students' listening ability.

2.How to carry out the task of speaking.

Teaching Methods:

1.Listening-and-answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.

2.Individual,pair or group work to make every student work in class.

Teaching Aids:

1.a tape recorder

2.a projector and some slides

3.some pictures

Teaching Procedures:

Step Ⅰ. Greetings and Lead-in

T:Good morning/afternoon,everyone.

Ss:Good morning/afternoon,teacher.

T:Sit down,please.In March,there is an important international festival.Do you know what festival it is?

Ss:Yes.It's Women's Day.

T:Very good.

Step Ⅱ.Warming up

T:Now we're going to talk about some famous women in the world.Open your books and turn to Page 22.Please look at the pictures.Talk about them in groups of four.You're given three minutes to discuss them.After that,I'll ask some students to talk about them.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Please begin.

(Teacher goes into the students and joins them in their discussion.)

T:(Three minutes later.)Are you ready?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Who'd like to talk about the first picture?

S1:I'd like to have a try.The woman in the first picture is Song Qingling,who is one of the greatest women in China.She made great contributions to opposing the war of aggression and defending the peace of the world.

T:Well done.Anything else?

S2：She stuck to the revolutionary views of Sun Zhongshan and she is also a great patriot and internationalist.

T:Very good.Let's talk about Picture 2.Can you try,Li Ming?

S3:Yes.Madame Curie is a great scientist of physics and chemistry,who is the first woman to receive two Nobel Prizes in the world.She is known for discovering radium.

T:Quite right.Sit down,please.What else do you know about her?

S4:She is also a great woman of great determination and courage.Though her husband Pierre died in a road accident,she still went on working.And she is willing to share her knowledge,her interest in women's rights.

T:Wonderful.Sit down,please.The third picture.Any volunteer?

S5:I'll try.The picture is about a famous American writer.She is a legendary figure,who was born in America.She lived in China for about 30 years.She loves the Chinese people and its culture.

T:You're right.Anything else?

Ss:No.

T:Pearl S.Buck wrote many novels set in China,for example,“The Good Earth”.She received the Nobel Prize for Art.She played an important part in connecting the civilization between the East and the West.Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.Let's look at the fourth picture.Wang Kai,can you try?

S6:Sorry,I don't know.

T:It doesn't matter.Sit down,please.The woman called Mother Teresa is a Christian.She won the Nobel Prize for Peace,and was loved and worshipped in India.She was given the highest honour as Gandi by the government of India.If you're interested in her,you can serf the Internet.

T:Well,let's look at the screen.Discuss the following questions in small groups.(Teacher shows the screen.)

1.Do you know a woman who really inspires you?Describe her and explain why you admire her.

2.It has often been said that life is difficult as it is.For women it sometimes seems twice as difficult.Is it more difficult for women to become famous or get jobs in high positions?What do you think?

Now you're given a few minutes to discuss.After a while,I'll ask some of you to report your answers.Do you understand?

Ss:Yes.

T:OK.You can begin.(A few minutes later)Well.Who can answer the first question?

S7:Deng Yaping has been inspiring me.She is a famous pingpang champion in the world.Although she isn't tall,she has the first-class skills and a strong will.She is loved by all people.

T:Very good.What about you,Li Jun?

S8:Li Suli is a woman who really inspires me.She is an ordinary ticket seller,who loves her job and makes great contributions at her ordinary post.She has been given the title of National Model Worker.

T:Well done.Let's look at the second question.Who can try?

S9:I'll try.Yes,it is more difficult for women to become famous or get jobs in high positions.Because in the modern society,the real equality between men and women hasn't completely come true.

T:Quite right.As you know,it is more difficult for women to become famous,but there are still many successful women in the world.So we'll succeed so long as we work hard.Is that true?

Ss:Yes.

Step Ⅲ.Listening

T:Now,let's do some listening.First,read the requirement in Part 1.Then listen to the tape carefully and write down your answers to the questions.(After the students read,the teacher says the following.)Do you know the meaning of the fourth question:What's become of her?

Ss:No.

T:The sentence“What's become of her?”means“What's happened to her?”Is that clear?

Ss:Yes.

(Teacher plays the tape for the students to listen for the first time to get the general idea,and then answer the questions.If the students have any difficulty,the teacher plays it again.At last,the teacher checks the answers.)

T:Next,let's do Part 2.(Teacher gives the students one minute to go through with the requirement in Part 2 and do it in the same way.)

Step Ⅳ.Speaking

T:Now,look at the three pictures on the screen.(Teacher shows the screen.)What kind of people do you think they are?Try to tell us something about their qualities.The words on the Bb may help you.(Write the new words on the Bb.)Do it by yourself first,and then exchange your opinions.Do you understand?

Ss:Yes.

T:(After a few minutes.)Let's look at Picture 1.What kind of person do you think she is?Any volunteer?OK.Li Xia,please.

S10:I think she is very hard-working.She must be very kind,friendly and honest.Judging from her clothes,she is a little conservative,but she is fond of her work.

T:Very good.Picture 2.Who'd like to try?

S11:I guess she is a modern woman,who is very smart,fashionable and cheerful.She loves life and work,and she is also a very healthy and lively professional woman.She is popular with young people.

T:Well done.The third picture.Who will try?

S12:I'll try.I believe the woman is very kind,warm and generous.She loves her family and child,but she is traditional.

T:Good.Sit down,please.

Step Ⅴ.Guessing game

T:Now let's play a guessing game.This game is played in groups of four.One in the group can first think of a famous woman,then write the name on a piece of paper.Fold it so that it can not be seen.The others in the group try to guess who she is.The person who writes down the name only answers“yes”or“no”.If the answer is“yes”,the student can ask more questions.If the answer is“no”,another student gets a chance to ask questions.Keep asking questions until you know who it is.First,I'll give you an example.Please look at the screen.

(Teacher shows the screen.)

Example:B:Is she Chinese?

A:Yes,she is.

B:Is she a famous singer?

A:No,she isn't.

C:Is she a famous actress?

A:No,she isn't.

D:Is she good at sports?

A:Yes,she is.

D:Has she ever been a world champion?

A:Yes,she has.

D:Does she play table tennis?

A:Yes,she does.

D:Is she tall?

A:No,she isn't.

B:Is her name Deng Yaping?

A:Yes,it is.

T:Then who'd like to act out the dialogue on the screen?

(Four students stand up and act out the dialogue.)

T:Thank you for your wonderful performances.Sit down,please.Now,you can begin.After a while,I'll ask some groups to act out your dialogues before the class.

(Teacher goes among the students while the students are playing the guessing game.)

T:(After a while.)Which group would like to act out your dialogue?

Ss:We'd like to.

…

Suggested answers:

Game 1.

B:Is she alive?

A:No,she isn't.

C:Is she Chinese?

A:Yes,she is.

C:Is she an actress?

A:No,she isn't.

D:Is she a writer?

A:Yes,she is.

D:Is she a modern writer?

A:Yes,she is.

D:Have we learnt her works?

A:Yes,we have.

D:Is her name Bing Xin?

A:Yes,it is.

Game 2.

B:Is she Chinese?

A:Yes,she is.

B:Is she good at sports?

A:No,she isn't.

C:Is she an actress?

A:Yes,she is.

C:Has she played a part in the film?

A:Yes,she has.

C:Has she played a role on TV?

A:Yes,she has.

C:Is she married?

A:No,she isn't.

D:Does she sing?

A:Yes,she does.

D:Does she have big eyes?

A:Yes,she does.

D:Is she Zhao Wei?

A:Yes,she is.

Step Ⅵ.Summary and Homework

T:Today we've done some listening and speaking,and we have also learnt something about some famous women in the world.If you're interested in the subject,you can serf the Internet to get some information about famous women and play a guessing game with your partner.From what we've learnt,we can understand that if we want to succeed,we must work hard,just as Madame Curie says:“Life is not easy for any of us.We must work,and above all we must believe in ourselves.We must believe that each of us is able to do something well and that,when we discover what this something is,we must work hard at it until we succeed.”(Write them on the Bb.)Besides,you should preview the reading text.Well,so much for today.Class is over.

Step Ⅶ.The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard

Unit 17 Famous women

The First Period

I.Words

Positive:strong smart honest friendly warm kind cheerful popular generous hard-working

Negative:weak stupid lazy dishonest mean tense cold-hearted unkind unfriendly miserable

Ⅱ.Life is not easy for any of us.We must work hard,and above all we must believe in ourselves.We must believe that each of us is able to do something well,and that,when we discover what this something is,we must work hard at it until we succeed.

--Marie Curie

Step Ⅷ.Record after Teaching

_____________________________________

★ 高一上期末词组复习(新课标版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

★ 高二英语第三单元教案 (新课标版高二英语上册教案教学设计)

★ 模块一 1-5单元练习答案一单元 (新课标版高一英语必修一教案教学设计)

★ e字母及其字母组合的发音规律教案教学设计(新课标版英语高一)

★ 《英语（新目标）》Unit 6 教学设计(新课标版七年级英语上册教案教学设计)

★ unit 1 phrases(人教版高一英语上册教案教学设计)

★ 高一上册人教版英语课本教学设计

★ 新教材高一英语UNIT9教案

★ 高一英语 Unit 3 Going Places(新课标版高一英语教案教学设计)